Air Cylinder CM2

Air Cylinder
Series CM2
20, 25, 32, 40
Series Variations
Series
Action
Standard
Series CM2
Double
acting
Single
acting
Non-rotating Rod
Series
CM2K
Double
acting
Rod
Cushion
Single
rod
Rubber
Double
rod
Rubber
Single rod
(Spring return/
Spring extend)
Series
CM2R
Single
rod
Copper/
Fluorine-free
Bore
size
(mm)
CJ1
Page
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Air
CG1
Rubber
Rubber
Double
acting
Clean
series
146
Double
rod
Direct Mount
With
Air-hydro
rod boot
128
Rubber
Single
acting
Standard variations
Built-in
One-touch fitting
Air
Single
rod
Single rod
(Spring return/
Spring extend)
Basic
156
171
MB
MB1
Air
CA2
20
176
Air
CS1
25
32
Rubber
181
CS2
40
Rubber
186
Air
Direct Mount,
Non-rotating Rod
Series
CM2RK
Double
acting
Single
rod
Low Friction
Series
193
Rubber
,,
CM2Q
Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y

both-direction low friction and low-speed operation.
(Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3.)
to realize
198
Centralized Piping
Series
CM2 P
Double
acting
Single
rod
Rubber
199
20
25
32
With End Lock

Series
CBM2
Double
acting
Rubber
Single
rod
(Lock in head
rod only)
40
204
Air
D-
-X
Low-speed cylinder
Series
CM2X
Refer to Best
Pneumatics No. 3.
Individual
-X
Technical
data
125
Combinations of Standard Products and Made to Order Specifications

Series CM2
Series CM2
,,
Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y to realize

both-direction low friction and low-speed operation.
: Standard
: Made to Order specifications
: Special product (Contact SMC for details.)
: Not available
Series
Action/
Type
Cushion
Symbol
Specification
Standard
Standard
D
CM2F
CM2- KJ
CM2H
10-, 1120CM2 RV
CM2X
XB6
XB7
XB9
XB12
XB13
XC3
XC4
XC5
XC6
XC8
XC9
XC10
XC11
XC12
XC13
XC20
XC22
XC25
Built-in magnet
XC27
Double clevis pins made of stainless

steel (Stainles steel 304)
XC29
Double knuckle joint with spring pin
XC35
XC38
XC52
With coil scraper
Applicable
bore size
CM2
(Standard)
Double acting
Single rod
Rubber
Air
Single acting
Double rod
Rubber
20 to 40
Air
Single rod
Rubber
CM2K
CM2R
(Not-rotating)
(Direct mount)
Double acting
Single rod
Rubber
Air
Double rod
Rubber
Air
CM2RK
CM2P
CM2Q
(Direct mount, Non-rotating) (Centralized Piping) (Low Friction)
Single acting
Double acting
Double acting
Single rod
Single rod
Single rod
Single rod
Single rod
Rubber
Rubber
Rubber
Rubber
Rubber
Air
Double acting Double acting
CBM2
CM2X
(With end Lock)
Low-speed cylinder Note 2)
Double acting
Double acting
Single rod
Single rod
Rubber
Air
Rubber
20 to 40
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
With one-touch fittings
CM2
With rod boot

Air-hydro type
20 to 40
Clean series
Note 3)
CG1
Note 3)
MB
Copper and Fluorine-free

Water resistant
Low-speed cylinder
MB1
Heat-resistant cylinder (10 to 150 C) Note 1)
CA2
Cold-resistant cylinder Note 1)

Low-speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)
CS1
External stainless steel cylinder

Low-speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)
CS2
Special port position

Note 3)
With heavy duty scraper

Heat-resistant cylinder (10 to 110 C) Note 1)
Made of stainless steel
Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
Note 3)
Note 3)
Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
Note 4)
Note 4)
Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
20 to 40
Tandem cylinder
Auto switch rail mounting
Head cover axial port
Note 4)
Fluororubber seal
No fixed orifice of connecting port
Note 3)
Vacuum specification (Rod through-hole)

Mounting nut with set screw
Note 1) The products with an auto switch are not compatible.

Note 2) Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3 for Low-speed cylinders.
Note 3) Available only for locking at head end.
Note 4) Available only for locking on rod side.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
126
127
Air Cylinder: Standard Type

Double Acting, Single Rod
Series
CM2
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Mounting style
B
L
F
G
C
D
U
Basic style
Axial foot style
Rod side flange style
Head side flange style
Single clevis style
Double clevis style
Rod side trunnion style
Cylinder stroke (mm)
T Head side trunnion style

E Clevis integrated style
BZ Boss-cut basic style
(Refer to Standard Stroke on page 129.)
Bore size
20
25
32
40
Boss-cut rod side

flange style
FZ
UZ
Boss-cut rod side

trunnion style
Cushion
Nil
A
20 mm
25 mm
Rubber bumper
Air cushion
Air-hydro cylinder: Rubber bumber only
32 mm
40 mm
Made to Order
(Refer to page 129 for details.)
With auto switch

With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
CM2
L 40
150 A
CDM2
L 40
150 A
Nil
J
K
Pneumatic
Air-hydro
Port thread type

Nil
TN
TF
F
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model
Number of
auto switches
Rod boot
Type
Nil
H
M9BW
Rc
None
Nylon tarpaulin
Heat resistant tarpaulin
NPT
Nil
S
n
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Auto switch
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is

G
required, there is no need to enter the symbol for the
Built-in one-touch fitting
auto switch.
Air-hydro type: Rc only
(Example) CDM2F32-100
Nil
Without auto switch
For the applicable auto switch model, refer to

the table below.
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for further information on auto switches.
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Diagnostic indication
(2-color indication)
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Reed switch
Grommet
No Yes No Yes No
Yes
Water resistant (2-color indication)

With diagnostic output (2-color indication)
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
2-wire
12V
4-wire (NPN)
5V, 12V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
24V
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W
Lead wire length (m)

Pre-wired
0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100V, 200V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet
Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m Nil (Example) M9NW

Solid state auto switches marked with are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m M (Example) M9NWM
D-A9V/M9V/M9WV and D-M9A(V)L cannot be mounted.
3 m L (Example) M9NWL
Do not indicate suffix N for no lead wire on D-A3A/A44A/G39A/K39A models.
5 m Z (Example) M9NWZ
D-A3A/A44A/G39A/K39A/B54/B64 cannot be mounted on bore sizes 20 and
None N (Example) H7CN
25 cylinder with air cushion.
Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 218 for details.
For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to pages 1328 and 1329.
D-A9/M9/M9W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (However, auto switch mounting brackets are assembled when being shipped.)
128

Series
CM2
Specifications
20
Bore size (mm)
25
Type
32
40
Pneumatic
Action
Double acting, Single rod
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure
1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure
0.05 MPa
CJ1
Ambient and fluid temperature

Not required (Non-lube)
Lubrication
CJP
Stroke length tolerance
Clevis integrated
JIS Symbol
Double acting,
Single rod
Rubber bumper: 50 to 750 mm/s, Air cushion: 50 to 1000 mm/s
Piston speed
Rubber bumper, Air cushion
Cushion
Allowable
kinetic energy
CJ2
Rubber bumper
0.27 J
0.4 J
0.65 J
1.2 J
CM2
Air cushion
(Effective cushion length (mm))
0.54 J
(11.0)
0.78 J
(11.0)
1.27 J
(11.0)
2.35 J
(11.8)
CG1
With air cushion
MB
Standard Stroke
Made to Order Specifications
(For details, refer to pages 1373 to 1498.)
Symbol
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
Specifications
32
XA Change of rod end shape

XB6
Heat resistant cylinder (150
XB7
Cold resistant cylinder
XB9
Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)
XB12 External stainless steel cylinder

XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)
XC3
Special port location
XC4
XC5
XC6
Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
XC8
XC9
MB1
Maximum stroke
(mm)
Standard stroke (1)

(mm)
CA2
1000
CS1
1500
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150

200, 250, 300
2000
40
CS2
2000
Note 1) Other intermediate strokes can be manufactured upon receipt of order.

Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible.
(Spacers are not used.)
Note 2) When exceeding 300 strokes, the allowable maximum stroke length is
determined by the stroke selection table (front matter 28).
Boss-cut style
Boss for the head side cover bracket
is eliminated and the total length of
cylinder is shortened.
XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
XC12 Tandem cylinder
XC13 Auto switch mounting rail style
XC20 Head cover axial port
XC22 Fluororubber seals
Comparison of the Full Length Dimension

(Versus standard type)
(mm)
XC25 No fixed orifice of connecting port

XC27 Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made of stainless steel
XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin
XC35 With coil scraper
XC52 Mounting nut with set screw
Boss-cut basic style (BZ)

Boss-cut flange style (FZ)
Boss-cut trunnion style (UZ)
Rod Boot Material

Symbol
Rod boot material
Nylon tarpaulin
Mounting style
Maximum ambient
temperature
Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot

itself.
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with

auto switches.
Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
Proper auto switch mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and mounting height
Operating range
Switch mounting bracket: Part no.
Mounting Bracket/Part No.

Min.
Mounting bracket order
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Description (for min. order)
Axial foot
CM-L020B
CM-L032B
CM-L040B 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
Flange
CM-F020B
CM-F032B
CM-F040B 1 flange
Single clevis
Double clevis
(with pins)
CM-C020B
CM-C032B
CM-C040B 1 single clevis, 3 liners
CM-D020B
CM-D032B
CM-D040B
Trunnion (with nuts)
CM-T020B
CM-T032B
CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
D-
-X
1 double clevis, 3 liners,

1 clevis pins, 2 retaining rings
Order 2 foot brackets for each cylinder unit.

3 Liners are attached with a clevis bracket for adjusting the mounting angle.
Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are attached.
Individual
-X
Technical
data
129
Series
CM2
Mounting Style and Accessory

Accessory
Standard equipment
Option
(3)
Mounting
Basic style
Axial foot style
Clevis integrated style
Single clevis style
(3)
Double clevis style
Head side trunnion style
Boss-cut basic style
Boss-cut flange style
Boss-cut trunnion style
(4)
Mounting Rod end Clevis Single Double Clevis

knuckle knuckle
nut
nut
pin
bracket
joint
joint
(6)
Rod
boot
(7)
Pivot
Pivot
bracket bracket
pin
(1)
(1)
Operating Precautions
(5)
(2)
Warning
(2)
1. Do not rotate the cover.
Mounting Bracket, Accessory/Material, Surface Treatment
Mounting
bracket
Accessory
Component parts
Foot
Flange
Single clevis
Double clevis
Trunnion
Rod end nut
Mounting nut
Trunnion nut
Clevis bracket
Clevis pin
Single knuckle joint
Material
Rolled steel plate
Rolled steel plate
Rolled steel
Rolled steel
Cast iron
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Rolled steel plate
Carbon steel
Rolled steel
40: Sulfur easy chipping steel
Double knuckle joint

Double clevis pin
Double knuckle joint pin
Pivot bracket
Pivot bracket pin
Rolled steel
40: Cast iron
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Rolled steel plate
Carbon steel
Bore size (mm)

Basic style
Axial foot style
Flange style
Single clevis style
Basic mass
Double clevis style
Trunnion style
Additional mass per each 50 mm of stroke
Clevis bracket (With pin)
Option
Double knuckle joint (With pin)
bracket
Pivot bracket
Pivot bracket pin
Calculation: (Example) CM2L32-100
Basic mass0.44 (Foot style, 32)
Additional mass0.08/50 stroke
Cylinder stroke100 stroke
0.44 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 0.60 kg
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder

or screwing a fitting into the port, it is likely to
damage the junction part with cover.
2. Do not operate with the cushion

needle in a fully closed condition.
Using it in the fully closed state will cause the
cushion seal to be damaged. When adjusting
the cushion needle, use the Hexagon
wrench key: nominal size 1.5.
3. Do not open the cushion needle

wide excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be
completely wide (more than 3 turns from fully
closed), it would be equivalent to the cylinder
with no cushion, thus making the impacts
extremely high. Do not use it in such a way.
Besides, using with fully open could give
damage to the piston or cover.
Surface treatment
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Electroless nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
(None)
Caution
1. Not able to disassemble.

Metallic bronze color painted for 40
(None)
(None)
Nickel plated
(None)
Mass
130
Be sure to read before handling.

Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for
Safety Instructions and pages 3 to
11 for Actuator and Auto Switch
Precautions.
(1)
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and double
clevis styles.
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion styles.
Note 3) Knuckle pin and snap ring (cotter pin for 40) are shipped together with double clevis
and double knuckle joint.
Note 4) Pin and snap ring are shipped together with clevis bracket.
Note 5) Clevis pins come with retaining rings (cotter pins for 40).
Note 6) Pivot brackets do not come with pins and retaining rings.
Note 7) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings.
Segment
Precautions
(kg)
20
25
32
40
0.14
0.29
0.20
0.12
0.18
0.19
0.18
0.13
0.19
0.17
0.04
0.07
0.06
0.07
0.06
0.02
0.21
0.37
0.30
0.19
0.25
0.27
0.28
0.19
0.28
0.26
0.06
0.07
0.06
0.07
0.06
0.02
0.28
0.44
0.37
0.27
0.32
0.33
0.34
0.26
0.35
0.32
0.08
0.14
0.06
0.07
0.06
0.02
0.56
0.83
0.68
0.52
0.65
0.69
0.66
0.53
0.65
0.63
0.13
0.14
0.23
0.20
0.06
0.03
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to

each other by caulking method, thus making
it impossible to disassemble. Therefore,
internal parts of a cylinder other than rod
seal are not replaceable.
2. Use caution to the popping of a

retaining ring.
When replacing rod seals and removing and
mounting a snap ring, use a proper tool
(retaining ring plier: tool for installing a type
C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is
used, it is likely to inflict damage to a human
body or peripheral equipment, as a retaining
ring may be flown out of the tip of a plier. Be
much careful with the popping of a retaining
ring. Besides, be certain that a retaining ring
is placed firmly into the groove of rod cover
before supplying air at the time of
installment.
3. Do not touch the cylinder during

operation.
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which
is running at a high speed and a high
frequency, because the surface of a cylinder
tube could get so hot enough as to cause
you get burned.
4. Do not use an air cylinder as an airhydro cylinder.

If it uses turbine oil in place of fluids for
cylinder, it may result in oil leakage.
5. Combine the rod end section, so

that a rod boot might not be twisted.
If a rod boot is installed with being twisted
when installing a cylinder, it will cause a rod
boot to fail during operation.

Air-hydro
Series
CM2
Built-in One-touch Fittings
CM2H Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
Rod boot
Air-hydro
A low hydraulic pressure cylinder used at a pressures of 1.0 MPa
or below.
Through the concurrent use of a CC series air-hydro unit, it is
possible to operate at a constant or low speeds or to effect an
intermediate stop, just like a hydraulic unit, while using
pneumatic equipment such as a valve.
CM2 Mounting style Bore size F
Stroke
Built-in One-touch fittings
This type has the One-touch fitting integrated in a cylinder, which

enables to reduce the piping labor and installing space
dramatically.
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
Specifications
Type
Fluid
Action
Bore size (mm)
Proof pressure
Max. operating pressure
Min. operating pressure
Piston speed
Cushion
Mounting
Specifications
Air-hydro
Turbine oil
Double acting single rod
20, 25, 32, 40
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.18 MPa
15 to 300 mm/s
+5 to +60C
+1.4
mm
0
Rubber bumper (Standard equipment)
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style,
Head side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis
style, Rod side trunnion style, Head side trunnion style,
Clevis integrated style, Boss-cut style
Auto switch can be mounted. Dimensions are the same as standard type
of series CM2.
Action
Bore size (mm)
CG1
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Cushion
MB
Rubber bumper
Piping
MB1
One-touch fittings
Piston speed
50 to 750 mm/s
Auto switch can be mounted.
CA2
CS1
CS2
Applicable Tubing O.D./I.D.

Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Applicable tubing
O.D./I.D. (mm)
6/4
6/4
6/4
8/6
Applicable tubing material

For construction, refer to page 134.
Since the dimensions of mounting style is the same as pages 136 to 143, refer to
those pages.
20, 25, 32, 40
Mounting
CM2
Can be used for either nylon, soft nylon or

polyurethane tubing.
Caution
1. One-touch fitting cannot be replaced.
One-touch fitting is press-fit into the cover, thus cannot be replaced.
2. Refer to Fittings and Tubing Precautions (Best Pneumatics No. 6) for
handling one-touch fittings.

For dimensions of each mounting style, refer to pages 136 to 143.
For other specifications, refer to page 129.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
131
Series
CM2
Copper/Fluorine-free
Clean Series
10-CM2 Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
Clean Series (With relief port)
20-CM2 Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
Copper/fluorine-free
The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room
graded Class 100 by making an actuators rod section a double
seal construction and discharging by relief port directly to the
outside of clean room.
The type which prevents copper based ions from generating by

changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel
plated treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate
the effects by copper based ions or fluororesins over the color
cathode ray tube.
Specifications
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
Action
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
0.05 MPa
Cushion
Relief port size
M5 x 0.8
Piston speed
Cushion
Piston speed
30 to 400 mm/s
Mounting
Head side flange style, Boss-cut style
Mounting
Construction
Construction
Standard port
Relief port
20, 25
Standard port
Relief port
Relief port
The above shows the case of rubber

bumper.
32, 40
For details, refer to the separate catalog, Pneumatic Clean Series.
132
Air cushion
50 to 750 mm/s
50 to 1000 mm/s


Rubber bumper

Series
CM2
Water Resistant
CDM2 Mounting style Bore size Port thread type R
Stroke A H7BAL -XC6
Specifications
Action
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
Water resistant cylinder
R
V
20, 25, 32, 40
Bore size (mm)
Cushion
Band mounting
Auto switch mounting
Piston rod, Rod end nut made of stainless steel (-XC6)
Made to Order
NBR seals (Nitrile rubber)

FKM seals (Fluororubber)
Specifications other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
CJ1
Cushion
Nil
A
Dimensions
CJP
Rubber bumper
Air cushion
Water resistant 2-color

indication solid state auto switch
CJ2
Made to Order
CM2
Ideal for use in a machine tool environment exposed to coolant mist.

Also suited for use in areas in which water splashes, such as food processing
equipment or car washers.
CG1
E2
E1
Bore size (mm)
NN2
NN1
0
0
M22 x 1.5
M20 x 1.5
220.033
200.033
Other dimensions are the same as double acting, single rod, standard
type. (: Same as the standard.)
MB
20

Mounting bracket
Axial foot
Caution
Rod seal and scraper is not replaceable.
Scraper is press-fit into the rod cover, thus cannot be replaced.
Details
Min. Bore size (mm)

order
20
CM-L020C 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
Flange
CM-F020C 1 flange
CM-T020C 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
25 to 40: Same as the standard type

Order 2 foot brackets for every cylinder.
Page 895
Low-speed Cylinder
CM2 X Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
Low-speed Cylinder
Smooth operation with a little sticking and slipping at low speed.

Can start smoothly with a little ejection even after being
rendered for hours.
Specifications
20, 25, 32, 40
Bore size (mm)

Type
Pneumatic
Action
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.025 MPa

Rubber bumper
Cushion
Piston Speed
Bore size (mm)
20
Piston speed (mm/s)

The dimensions are the same as the double acting, single rod type.
Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3 for details.
Allowable kinetic energy (J)
25
32
40
0.5 to 300
0.27
0.4
0.65
1.2
Refer to Best Pneumatics No. 3 for details.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
133
Series
CM2
Rubber bumper
Boss-cut style
Air-hydro
With air cushion
Component Parts
No.
1
2A
2B
2C
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Description
Rod cover
Head cover A
Head cover B
Head cover C
Cylinder tube
Piston
Piston rod
Bushing
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Note
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Hard chrome plated
Carbon steel
Copper oil-impregnated sintered alloy
Seal retainer
Retaining ring
Bumper A
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Urethane
Bumper B
Retaining ring
Urethane
Stainless steel
Description
Material
Note
Clevis bushing
Piston seal
Piston gasket
Wear ring
Mounting nut
Rod end nut

NBR
NBR
Resin
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Replacement Part: Seal

With rubber bumper/With air cushion/Built-in One-touch fittings
Phosphate coated
Basic style, Boss-cut style, Clevis integrated style
134
No.
12
13
14
15
16
17
No.
18
Description Material
Rod seal
NBR
Part no.
20
PDU-8Z
25
32
40
PDU-10Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
Air-hydro
Rod seal
18
NBR
HDU-8
HDU-10
HDU-12L
HDU-14
Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately.
Grease pack part no.: GR-S-010 (10 g)

CM2
Series
Basic Style (B)

CM2B Bore size
Stroke
G
Width across flats B2 H2 G
2 x NN
MM
AL
A
Width across flats KA
K
H
Effective thread length

2 x FL
NA
2 x Eh8
Width across flats B1
H1
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
CJ1
NA
CJP
S + Stroke
CJ2
ZZ + Stroke
CM2
With rod boot
8
Cushion needle
(Width across flats 1.5)
With air cushion

8
WA
45
WA
CG1
MB
JH
MB1
CA2
N1
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
N1
CS1
JW
CS2
Boss-cut style
One-touch fitting port size P
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
AL
B1
B2
FL
H1
H2
KA
MM
NA
NN
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 00.033
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
26 00.033
13
10.5
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
26 00.033
32 00.039
13
10.5
45
37.5 5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5 M26 x 1.5
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5 42.5
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
40
24
21
22
41
14
M32 x 2
ZZ
62
116
62
120
64
122
88
154
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Symbol
ZZ
h
l
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131
156
181 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
143
156
168
181
206
231
256
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
147
160
172
185
210
235
260
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
149
162
174
187
212
237
262
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140
165
190 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
181
194
206
219
244
269
294
Str
oke
Bore size
With Rod Boot

Bore size
JH
(mm)
Boss-cut Style
JW
20
23.5 10.5
25
23.5 10.5
32
23.5 10.5
40
27
10.5
Bore size Without

rod boot 1 to 50 51 to 100
20
103
130 143
25
107
134 147
32
109
136 149
40
138
165 178
(mm)
ZZ
With rod boot
With Air Cushion
(mm)
(mm)
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
155 168 193 218 243
32
17.5
13
32
27
159 172 197 222 247
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
D-
161 174 199 224 249
-X
190 203 228 253 278
Individual
-X
Technical
data
135
Series
CM2
Axial Foot Style (L)

H
K
F G
H2
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
Width across
2 x NN
(Effective thread length 2 x FL)
G F
A
AL
H1
2 x LC
flats B2
4 x LD
MM
Y
Width across flats NA

S + Stroke
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
N
LT
LH
Stroke
CM2L Bore size
With rod boot
LX
LZ
JH
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
With air cushion
JW
Cushion needle
WA
45
WA
N1
N1
G One-touch fitting port size P
(mm)
Bore size
A AL B B1 B2 D
F FL G
H H1 H2
K KA LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ
MM
N NA
NN
20
18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5
8 28 5
4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
25
22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 33.5 5.5 8
4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
32
22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
40
24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4
With Rod Boot

Symbol
7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
Z ZZ
62 20 8 21 131
62 20 8 25 135
64 20 8 25 137
88 23 10 27 171
(mm)
l
Z
h
B3
20
30
36
19.2
68
81
93
106
131
156
181 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
48
61
73
86
111
136
161
25
32
36
19.2
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
52
65
77
90
115
140
165
32
32
36
19.2
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
52
65
77
90
115
140
165
40
41
46
21.2
77
90
102
115
140
165
190 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
54
67
79
92
117
142
167
Str
oke
Bore size
With Rod Boot

Symbol
Str
oke
Bore size
(mm)
ZZ
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
JH
JW
With Air Cushion
(mm)
(mm)
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
24.5
20
158
171
183
196
221
246
271
23.5 10.5
25
17.5
13
25
25
162
175
187
200
225
250
275
23.5 10.5
32
17.5
13
32
27
32
164
177
189
202
227
252
277
23.5 10.5
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
40
198
211
223
236
261
286
311
136
27
10.5

CM2
Series
Rod Side Flange Style (F)

Stroke
2 x FD
Mounting
hole
40
MM
FX
Width across
flats KA
FZ
H1
H2
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
E
I
FY
C2
4 x FD
Mounting hole
CM2F Bore size
AL
A
20 to 32
Effective thread
length 2 x FL
1.5
FT
N
K
Z
H
CJ1
CJP
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
With rod boot
Boss-cut style
CG1
MB
JH
MB1
ZZ + Stroke
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
CA2
JW
CS1
Cushion needle
45
With air cushion
WA
WA
N1
N1
G
CS2
(mm)
Bore size
A AL B
B1 B2 C2
18 15.5 34 13 26 30
20
F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G H H1 H2 I K KA MM
13 10.5 7 4 60 75 8 41 5 8 28 5 6 M8 x 1.25
13 10.5 7 4 60 75 8 45 6 8 33.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25
13 10.5 7 4 60 75 8 45 6 8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25
32
8 20 0.033
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 00.033
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 00.033
40
24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 0.039 16 13.5
25
66 36 82 11 50
10 46.5
N NA
NN
15 24 M20 x 1.5
15 30 M26 x 1.5
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
Z ZZ
62 37 116
62 41 120
64 41 122
88 45 154
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Symbol
ZZ
B3
20
30
36
20
68
81
93
106
131
156
181 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
143
156
168
181
206
231
256
25
32
36
20
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
147
160
172
185
210
235
260
32
32
36
20
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
149
162
174
187
212
237
262
40
41
46
23
77
90
102
115
140
165
190 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
181
194
206
219
244
269
294
Str
oke
Bore size
With Rod Boot (mm)

Bore size
JH
Boss-cut Style
20
23.5 10.5
25
23.5 10.5
32
23.5 10.5
40
27
10.5
(mm)
ZZ
With rod boot
JW
Bore size Without

rod boot 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20
103
130 143 155 168 193 218 243
25
107
134 147 159 172 197 222 247
32
109
136 149 161 174 199 224 249
40
138
165 178 190 203 228 253 278
With Air Cushion
(mm)
(mm)
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
32
17.5
13
32
27
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
137
CM2
Series
Head Side Flange Style (G)

Stroke
G
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
MM
Width
across flats KA
H2
2 x FD
Mounting hole
AL
A
K
H
FX
FZ
N
FT
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
8
With rod boot
4 x FD
Mounting hole
E
D
H1 2 x NN
FY
Effective thread length 2 x FL

C2
CM2G Bore size
40
20 to 32
JH
Cushion needle
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
JW
WA
With air cushion
45
WA
N1
N1
G
(mm)
Bore size
AL
B1
B2
C2
20
18
15.5
34
13
26
30
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
52
22
41
47.3
14
32 0.039
Bore size
KA
MM
NA
NN
20
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
25
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
32
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
40
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
M32 x 2
FZ
H1
H2
60
FY
75
41
28
60
75
45
33.5
60
75
45
37.5
66
36
82
11
50
10
46.5
FL
FD
FT
FX
13
10.5
13
10.5
13
10.5
16
13.5
(mm)
With Air Cushion
ZZ
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
62
107
116
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
62
111
120
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
64
113
122
32
17.5
13
32
27
88
143
154
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
(mm)
Built-in One-touch Fittings (mm)
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Symbol
ZZ
B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131
156
181 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
143
156
168
181
206
231
256
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
147
160
172
185
210
235
260
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
149
162
174
187
212
237
262
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140
165
190 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
181
194
206
219
244
269
294
Str
oke
Bore size
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Bore size
JH
JW
20
23.5
10.5
25
23.5
10.5
32
23.5
10.5
40
27
10.5
138

Series
CM2
Single Clevis Style (C)

Stroke
CDH10
Effective thread length FL
H1 NN
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
E
D
CI
+ 0.058
0
NA
CM2C Bore size
AL
A
MM
CJ1
CX 0.1
0.2
K
H
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJP
NA
U
RR
CJ2
CM2
With rod boot
CG1
JH
MB
MB1
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
With air cushion
CA2
JW
WA
Cushion needle
45
WA
N1
CS1
CS2
N1
(mm)
Bore size
AL B1
FL
H1
20 0.033 13 10.5
0
10 10 26 0.033 13 10.5
41
28
45
33.5 5.5
45
16 13.5 11 50
CI CD CX
20
18 15.5 13 24
25
22 19.5 17 30
10
10 12 26
24 21 22 38 10 15 14 32
22 19.5 17 30
32
40
0
0.033
0
0.039
13 10.5
K KA
30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
46.5
12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
MM
N NA
NN
RR
62 14 133 142
62 14 137 146
64 14 139 148
11 88 18 177 188
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Symbol
Str
ZZ
B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131
156
181 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
160
173
185
198
223
248
273
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
164
177
189
202
227
252
277
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
166
179
191
204
229
254
279
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140
165
190 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
204
217
229
242
267
292
317
oke
Bore size
With Rod Boot

Symbol
Str
oke
(mm)
ZZ
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
JH
JW
With Air Cushion
(mm)
(mm)
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
20
169
182
194
207
232
257
282
23.5 10.5
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
25
173
186
198
211
236
261
286
23.5 10.5
32
17.5
13
32
27
32
175
188
200
213
238
263
288
23.5 10.5
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
40
215
228
240
253
278
303
328
Bore size
27
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
10.5
139
Series
CM2
Double Clevis Style (D)

CM2D Bore size
Stroke
+ 0.058
0

CD hole H10
G Axis d9 0.040
0.076
G 2xP
H1 NN
CL
I
E
D
CI
NA
(Rc, NPT, G)
AL
A K
H
MM
CX
CZ
NA
N
L
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
With rod boot
RR
JH
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
JW
Cushion needle
WA
With air cushion
45
WA
N1
N1
(mm)
Bore size
A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D
F FL G
H1
8 20 00.033 13 10.5 8
30 25 10 19 10 26 00.033 13 10.5 8
30 25 10 19 12 26 00.033 13 10.5 8
41
28
30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
45
6 33.5 5.5 8
30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
45
6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
20
18 15.5 13
25
22 19.5 17
32
22 19.5 17
40
24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14 32 00.039 16 13.5 11 50
24 25 10 19
K KA L
5
8 46.5 7
MM
N NA
NN
P RR S
Z ZZ
62 14 133 142
62 14 137 146
64 14 139 148
11 88 18 177 188
Clevis pin and snap ring (cotter pin for bore size 40) are shipped together.
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Symbol
B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131
156
181 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
160
173
185
198
223
248
273
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
164
177
189
202
227
252
277
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
166
179
191
204
229
254
279
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140
165
190 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
204
217
229
242
267
292
317
Str
oke
Bore size
With Rod Boot

Symbol
Str
oke
Bore size
(mm)
ZZ
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
JH
JW
With Air Cushion
(mm)
(mm)
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
24.5
20
169
182
194
207
232
257
282
23.5 10.5
25
17.5
13
25
25
173
186
198
211
236
261
286
23.5 10.5
32
17.5
13
32
27
32
175
188
200
213
238
263
288
23.5 10.5
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
40
215
228
240
253
278
303
328
140
27
10.5

Series
CM2
Rod Side Trunnion Style (U)

Stroke
Width across
flats B1 H1
With rod boot
AL
A
CJ1

2 x FL
TT
K
Z
H
CJP
N
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
Boss-cut style
2 x NN
E
I
MM
TX
TZ
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
TY
TD
CM2U Bore size
CG1
JH
MB
MB1
ZZ + Stroke
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
JW
CA2
Cushion needle
45
WA
WA
CS1
With air cushion
CS2
N1
N1
G
(mm)
Bore size
20
25
32
40
Bore size
20
25
32
40
A
18
22
22
24
AL
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
S
62
62
64
88
TD
8
9
9
10
B1
13
17
17
22
TT
10
10
10
11
B2
26
32
32
41
TX
32
40
40
53
D
8
10
12
14
E
20 00.033
26 00.033
26 00.033
32 00.039
TY
32
40
40
53
TZ
52
60
60
77
F
13
13
13
16
Z
36
40
40
44.5
FL
10.5
10.5
10.5
13.5
G
8
8
8
11
H
41
45
45
50
Symbol
Str
oke
20
25
32
40
1 to 50 51 to 100
12.5 25
12.5 25
12.5 25
12.5 25
l
101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
37.5 50
75
37.5 50
75
37.5 50
75
37.5 50
75
301 to 400
100
100
100
100
(mm)
ZZ
Bore size
20
25
32
40
Without
rod boot 1 to 50
130
103
134
107
136
109
165
138
51 to 100
143
147
149
178
With rod boot

101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
155 168 193
159 172 197
161 174 199
190 203 228
301 to 400
218
222
224
253
401 to 500
243
247
249
278
KA
6
8
10
12
MM
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M14 x 1.5
N
15
15
15
21.5
NA
24
30
34.5
42.5
NN
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2
B3
30
32
32
41
36
36
36
46
25
25
25
26
401 to 500
176
180
180
184.5
1 to 50
143
147
149
181
51 to 100
156
160
162
194
Str
Bore size
oke
20
25
32
40
Z
151 to 200
101
105
105
109.5
201 to 300
126
130
130
134.5
301 to 400
151
155
155
159.5
With Air Cushion

Bore size
20
25
32
40
P
1
1
1
1
8
8
8
4
(mm)
Symbol
401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150

125 63
76
88
125 67
80
92
125 67
80
92
125 71.5 84.5 96.5
Boss-cut Style
K
5
5.5
5.5
7
With Rod Boot
(mm)
ZZ
116
120
122
154
With Rod Boot

Bore size
I
28
33.5
37.5
46.5
H1
5
6
6
8
(mm)
N1
WA
17.5
17.5
17.5
21.5
13
13
13
16
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150

68
81
93
72
85
97
72
85
97
77
90 102
101 to 150
168
172
174
206
ZZ
151 to 200
181
185
187
219
h
151 to 200
106
110
110
115
201 to 300
206
210
212
244
201 to 300
131
135
135
140
301 to 400
231
235
237
269
301 to 400
156
160
160
165
401 to 500
256
260
262
294
JH JW
23.5
23.5
23.5
27

Bore size
20
25
32
40
401 to 500
181
185
185
190
(mm)
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
(mm)
8
8
8
11
6
6
6
8
21.5
24.5
27
32.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
141
Series
CM2
Head Side Trunnion Style (T)

Stroke
2xP
G
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
E
D
Width across flats B1 H1
TD
TY
CM2T Bore size
MM
AL
A
K
H
With rod boot
TX
TZ
TT
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
8
JH
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
Cushion needle
JW
WA
With air cushion
N1
N1
G
45
WA
(mm)
Bore size
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
22
41
14
32 0.039
FL
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
33.5
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
37.5
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
16
13.5
11
50
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
M32 x 2
With Rod Boot
(mm)
S
TD
TT
TX
TY
TZ
ZZ
20
62
10
32
32
52
108
118
25
62
10
40
40
60
112
122
32
64
10
40
40
60
114
40
88
10
11
53
53
77
143.5
oke
8
4
B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131
156
181
124
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185
154
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140
165
190
Str
oke
Bore size
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
(mm)
Symbol
Str
With Rod Boot

Bore size
(mm)
Symbol
Bore size
ZZ
JH JW
20
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
135
148
160
173
198
223
248
145
158
170
183
208
233
258 23.5 10.5
25
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
139
152
164
177
202
227
252
149
162
174
187
212
237
262 23.5 10.5
32
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
141
154
166
179
204
229
254
151
164
176
189
214
239
264 23.5 10.5
40
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125 170.5 183.5 195.5 208.5 233.5 258.5 283.5 181
194
206
219
244
269
294
With Air Cushion
(mm)
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
32
17.5
13
32
27
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
142
27
10.5

Series
CM2
Clevis Integrated Style (E)

Stroke
H
A K
AL
H1
N
G
LP
L RR
U
N
G
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
CD
NA
CX 001
+ 0.058
0
MM
2 x LD
NN
CJ1
CJP
LH
E
D
CI
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke
S + Stroke
NA
CM2E Bore size
CJ2
LF
LT
LG
LY
CM2
LV
Refer to page 145 for details
of clevis pivot bracket.
With rod boot

8
CG1
Cushion needle
With air cushion

8
WA
MB1
45
WA
MB
CA2
JH
CS1
N1
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
N1
CS2
JW

G
(mm)
F
FL
H1
13
10.5
41
13
10.5
45
13
10.5
45
16
13.5
11
50
Bore size
AL
B1
CD
CI
CX
20
18
15.5
13
20
12
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
22
12
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
10
27
20
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
22
10
33
20
14
32 0.039
20
25
32
40
RR
62
11.5 115 124
62
11.5 119 128
12
64
12
88
KA
MM
NA
NN
28
12
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
33.5
5.5
12
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
37.5
5.5
10
15
M10 x 1.25
15
46.5
12
15
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Bore size
B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131
156
181
14.5 124 136
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185
14.5 153 165
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140
165
190
Str
oke
Bore size
M32 x 2
(mm)
Symbol
ZZ
34.5 M26 x 1.5
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Symbol
Str
Bore size
oke
ZZ
JH
JW
20
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
142
155
167
180
205
230
255
151
164
176
189
214
239
264 23.5 10.5
25
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
146
159
171
184
209
234
259
155
168
180
193
218
243
268 23.5 10.5
32
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
151
164
176
189
214
239
264
163
176
188
201
226
251
276 23.5 10.5
40
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
180
193
205
218
243
268
293
192
205
217
230
255
280
319
With Air Cushion
(mm)
Clevis Pivot Bracket
27
10.5
(mm)
Bore size
N1
WA
Bore size
Bore size
LD
LF
LG
LH
LP
LT
LV
LY
LZ
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
20
6.8
15
30
30
37
3.2
18.4
59
152
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
25
6.8
15
30
30
37
3.2
18.4
59
156
32
17.5
13
32
27
32
15
40
40
50
28
75
174
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
40
15
40
40
50
28
75
203
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
143
CM2
Series
Accessory Bracket Dimensions

Single Knuckle Joint
ND
(mm)
I-020B/032B
Y (Max.)
MM
(mm)
I-040B
Material: Rolled steel
R1
Material: Free cutting sulfur steel
ND
MM
U1
H
Z (Min.)
R2
Bore size
20
25, 32
40
ND
E1
NX
NX1
A1
L1
A
R1
E1
MM
U1
A1
L1
A
U1
NX
MM
NDH10
NX1
U1
R2
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
A A1 E1 L1
NDH10
NX
R1 U1
9 + 00.058
9 + 00.058
12 + 00.070
9 0.1
0.2
9 0.1
0.2
16 0.1
0.3
14
10
11
66
9 0.1
0.2
10 14
10
14
69
48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9 + 00.058
9 0.1
0.2
10 14
20
14
13
92
20
25, 32
40
46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 + 00.058
14
I-020B
I-032B
I-040B
18
41
M8 x 1.25
22
45
M10 x 1.25
24
50
M14 x 1.5
Double Knuckle Joint

ND hole H10
MM
69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 + 00.070 16 0.1

0.3 15.5 20
(mm)
Y (Max.)
MM
Axis d9
NX2
L
A
U2
H
Z (Min.)
R2
Bore size
MM
ND
NX2
R2
U2
20
25, 32
40
18
41
25
M8 x 1.25
9 + 0.2
0.1
10
14
11
66
22
45
25
M10 x 1.25
9 + 0.2
0.1
10
14
14
69
24
50
49.7 M14 x 1.5
12
16 ++ 0.3
0.1
13
25
13
92

Y-020B/Y-032B
(mm)
Y-040B
Material: Cast iron
R1
MM
R1
ND hole H10
ND hole H10
MM
Axis d9
A1
NX
NZ
L
E1
NX
NZ
L
E 1
Axis d9
U1
L1
A
A1
U1
L1
A
Retaining ring
Cotter pin
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
A1
E1
L1
MM
ND
NX
NZ
R1
U1
Applicable pin
part number
Y-020B
Y-032B
Y-040B
20
46
16
20
25
36
M8 x 1.25
9 + 0.2
0.1
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
25, 32
48
18
20
25
38
M10 x 1.25
9 + 0.2
0.1
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
40
68
22
24
49.7
55
M14 x 1.5
12
16 ++ 0.3
0.1
38
13
25
CDP-3
3 x 18 l
size
Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for 40) are attached.
Double Clevis Pin/Material: Carbon steel
Bore size/20, 25, 32

CDP-1
2 x 3
Through hole
Bore size/40
CDP-3
2 x 3
Through hole
144
Cotter pin
3 x 18 l
Retaining ring: Type C9 for axis
Retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are attached.
(mm)
CDP-1
Bore size/40
CDP-2
Double Knuckle Pin/Material: Carbon steel
(mm)
Cotter pin
3 x 18 l

Rod End Nut
(mm)
Series
CM2
Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2E)
(mm)
Material: Carbon steel
Material: Rolled steel plate
LR
NT-02
NT-03
NT-04
20
25, 32
40
13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25
17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25
22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5
LT
Applicable
bore size
LF
LE
LH
+
LC hole + 0.15
0.05
Axis 0.040
0.076
Part no.
L
LV
LX
CJ1
LG
CJP
2 x LD
LY
CJ2
Mounting Nut
(mm)
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
20
SN-020B
SN-032B 25, 32
40
SN-040B
CM-E020B
CM-E032B
20, 25
32, 40
24.5
6.8
22
15
30
30
10
3.2
12
59 18.4
CD-S02
34
10
25
15
40
40
13
20
75
CD-S03
LC LD LE LF LG LH LR LT LX LY LV Applicable pin
part no.
Clevis Pin (For CM2E)
26
30
25.5 M20 x 1.5
32
37
31.5 M26 x 1.5
8
m
MB1
CA2
(mm)
CS1
l
L
CS2
Applicable
retaining
ring part no.
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
Dd9
CD-S02
CD-S03
20, 25
32, 40
8 0.040
0.076
7.6
24.5
19.5
1.6
0.9
Type C 8 for axis
10 0.040
0.076
9.6
34
29
1.35
1.15
Type C 10 for axis

B
CG1
41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10
Trunnion Nut
CM2
MB
(mm)
28
d
D
Applicable
bore size
Note 1) Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are attached.
Note 2) It cannot be used for single clevis style (CM2C) and double clevis style (CM2D).
Part no.
Note) Retaining rings are attached.
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
20
TN-020B
TN-032B 25, 32
40
TN-040B
26
28 25.5 M20 x 1.5
10
32
34 31.5 M26 x 1.5
10
41
45 40.5 M32 x 2
10
Regarding mounting bracket, accessory made of stainless steel (Some are not available.), refer to page 1408 for -XB12, External stainless steel cylinder.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
145
CM2
Series
Single Clevis
Z + Stroke
CX
CD
90
51
40
3.2
6.8
20.5
40
57
7.5
LX
LZ
6.8 x 3.4
Rotation Angle
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
A + B + 90
20
25, 32
40
25
21
26
85
81
86
200
192
202
Mounting
CM2C
(Single clevis
style)
Applicable bore size CX
Part no.
20
25
32
40
CM-B032
CM-B040
Z + Stroke
133
137
139
177
10
15
CD
LX
LZ
44
60
10
49
65
Note) Pivot brackets do not come with pivot bracket pins and retaining rings.
Rod Side Trunnion
Head Side Trunnion

Z + Stroke
TX
TX
Z + Stroke
CD
51
40
3.2
3.2
40
51
CD
6.8
LX
LZ
6.8 x 3.4
20.5
7.5
20.5
40
57
6.8 x 3.4
6.8
7.5
40
57
LX
LZ
(mm)
Part no.
Applicable bore size
TX
CM-B020
20
25
32
40
32
Rod side trunnion

Z + Stroke
36
40
40
53
44.5
Mounting
CM2U/CM2T
(Rod side/Head side
trunnion)
CM-B032
CM-B040
Head side trunnion

Z + Stroke
108
112
114
143.5
CD
LX
LZ
66
82
74
90
10
87
103
Pivot Bracket
Pivot Bracket Pin (For CM2C)
2 brackets per set

40
3.
CD +0.15
+0.05
11
40
5.2
5.2
40
.8
3.2
28
28
(mm)
Applicable
Part no.
bore size
(mm)
145-1
57
57
Part no.
CM-B020 (2)
CM-B032
CM-B040
Dd9
11
CD +0.15
+0.05
3.
25
3.
17 0.2
7.5
170.2
6.8
3.
25
.8
40
3.4
6.8
3.4
R
3.2
7.5
6
CD
8
9
10
Note 1) Pivot brackets do not come with pivot

bracket pins and retaining rings.
Note 2) Only for trunnion type
Dd9
Applicable
retaining
ring part no.
8.6 25 19.2 1.75 1.15 Type C 9 for axis

20 to 32 CDP-1 9 0.040
0.076
40
9.6 34 29 1.75 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
CD-S03 10 0.040
0.076
Note) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings.

Double Acting, Double Rod
Series
CM2W
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Nil
Air cushion
Air-hydro cylinder: Rubber
bumber only
Mounting style
B
L
F
U
Bore size
Basic style
Flange style
Nil
Pneumatic
Trunnion style
Air-hydro
With auto switch
20
25
32
40
Type
Axial foot style
20 mm
L 40
150 A
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto

switch is required, there is no need to enter
the symbol for the auto switch.
(Example) CDM2WF32-100
Rc
M9BW
Port thread type

NPT
Heat resistant tarpaulin (Both ends)
Made to Order
CDM2W
Nil
Nylon tarpaulin (Both ends)

Heat resistant tarpaulin (One end)
40 mm
150 A
TN
TF
F
J
JJ
K
KK
32 mm
L 40
None
Nylon tarpaulin (One end)
25 mm
CM2W
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Rod boot
Nil
(Refer to Standard Stroke on

page 147.)
Auto switch
Without auto switch

Nil
For the applicable auto switch model, refer
to the table below.
Built-in one-touch fitting
Air-hydro type: Rc only
Number of
auto switches
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
1 pc.
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
DC
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
No Yes No Yes No
Yes
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Connector
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
12V
4-wire (NPN)
Grommet
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire

Reed switch
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
5V, 12V
24V
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100V, 200V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
146

Series
CM2W
Specifications
20
Bore size (mm)
25
Action
32
40
Double acting, Double rod
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.08 MPa

Lubrication
CJ1

+1.4
0 mm

Piston speed
Rubber bumper: 50 to 750 mm/s, Air cushion: 50 to 1000 mm/s
Cushion

Rubber bumper
Allowable
kinetic energy Air cushion
0.27 J
0.4 J
0.65 J
1.2 J
0.54 J
(11.0)
0.78 J
(11.0)
1.27 J
(11.0)
2.35 J
(11.8)
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
Standard Stroke
Standard stroke (1)
(mm)
Maximum stroke
(mm)
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150

200, 250, 300
500
Bore size
(mm)
JIS Symbol
Double acting
MB
MB1
20
25
32
CA2
CS1
40

Symbol
Rod Boot Material
Accessory Bracket
Symbol
For mounting brackets, refer to pages 144

and 145.
One side Both sides
Specifications

XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (150

XC3 Special port location
XC4
XC5
XC6

XC38 Vacuum (Rod through-hole)
Rod boot material
JJ
KK Heat resistant tarpaulin
Maximum ambient
temperature
Nylon tarpaulin
Maximum ambient temperature for the rod

boot itself.
XB7
CS2

Min.
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Axial foot
CM-L020B
CM-L032B
Flange
CM-F020B
CM-F032B
CM-F040B 1 flange
CM-T020B
CM-T032B
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with auto switches.

Proper auto switch mounting position (detection at stroke end) and mounting height
Operating range
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
147
CM2W
Series

Accessory
Standard equipment
Option
Precautions
(2)
Mounting
nut
Mounting
Rod end
nut
Single knuckle Double knuckle

joint
joint
Rod boot

Precautions.
Basic style
Axial foot style
Flange style
(1)
Trunnion style
Note
Note 1) Trunnion nuts are attached for trunnion style.

Note 2) Pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size 40) are shipped together with
double knuckle joint.
Mass
(kg)
20
25
32
40
Basic style
0.16
0.25
0.32
0.65
Axial foot style
0.31
0.41
0.48
0.92
Flange style
0.22
0.34
0.41
0.77
Trunnion style
0.20
0.32
0.38
0.75
0.06
0.09
0.13
0.19
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.23
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.20
Bore size (mm)
Basic mass

Option
bracket
Calculation: (Example) CM2WL32-100

Additional mass0.13/50 st
Cylinder stroke100 st
0.48 + 0.13 x 100/50 = 0.74 kg
Warning
2. Do not operate with the cushion

needle in a fully closed condition.
the cushion needle, use the Hexagon
3. Do not open the cushion needle

wide excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be
completely wide (more than 3 turns from fully
closed), it would be equivalent to the cylinder
with no cushion, thus making the impacts
extremely high. Do not use it in such a way.
Besides, using with fully open could give
damage to the piston or cover.
Caution
2. Use caution to the popping of a

retaining ring.
When replacing rod seals and removing and
mounting a retaining ring, use a proper tool
(retaining ring plier: tool for installing a type
C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is
used, it is likely to inflict damage to a human
body or peripheral equipment, as a retaining
ring may be flown out of the tip of a plier. Be
much careful with the popping of a retaining
ring. Besides, be certain that a retaining ring
is placed firmly into the groove of rod cover
before supplying air at the time of
installment.
3. Do not touch the cylinder during

operation.
you get burned.
4. Do not use an air cylinder as an airhydro cylinder.

If it uses turbine oil in place of fluids for
cylinder, it may result in oil leakage.
5. Combine the rod end section, so

that a rod boot might not be
twisted.
148


CM2W
Air-hydro
CM2WH Mounting style Bore size
Series
Stroke Rod boot
CM2W Mounting style Bore size F
Air-hydro
A low hydraulic pressure cylinder used at a pressures of 1.0 MPa or
below.
intermediate stop, just like a hydraulic unit, while using pneumatic
equipment such as a valve.
Stroke

This type has the One-touch fitting integrated in a cylinder, which
enables to reduce the piping labor and installing space dramatically.
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Specifications
Type
Air-hydro type
Fluid
Turbine oil
Action
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.18 MPa
Piston speed
15 to 300 mm/s
+1.4
Thread tolerance
0 mm
Cushion
Mounting
Basic style, Axial foot style, Flange style, Trunnion style
* Auto switch can be mounted.

Since the dimensions of mounting style is the same as pages 153 to
155, refer to those pages.
CG1
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)

1.0 MPa
0.08 MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Piping
One-touch fitting
Piston speed
Mounting
MB
20, 25, 32, 40
MB1
CA2
CS1
50 to 750 mm/s
Basic style, Axial foot style, Flange style, Trunnion style
* Auto switch can be mounted.
CS2

Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Applicable tubing
O.D./I.D. (mm)
6/4
6/4
6/4
8/6

polyurethane tube.
Caution

D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
149
Series
CM2W
Clean Series
10-CM2W Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
20-CM2W Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
Clean Series (With relief port)

The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room graded
Class 100 by making an actuators rod section a double seal
construction and discharging by relief port directly to the outside of
clean room.

changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel plated
treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate the effects by
copper based ions or fluororesins over the color cathode ray tube.
Specifications
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
Action
Bore size (mm)

20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.08 MPa
0.08 MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Relief port size
M5 x 0.8
Piston speed
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Air cushion
Piston speed
50 to 750 mm/s
50 to 1000 mm/s
30 to 400 mm/s
Mounting
Mounting
Basic style, Axial foot style,

Flange style, Trunnion style
Basic style, Axial foot style, Flange style

Construction
Construction
Standard port
Relief port
20, 25
The above shows the case of rubber bumper.
Standard port
Relief port
Relief port
32, 40
150

Series CM2W
Construction
Rubber bumper
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
Air-hydro
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
With air cushion
CS1
CS2
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Rod cover
Cylinder tube
Piston
Piston rod
Bushing
Seal retainer
Retaining ring
Bumper A
Bumper B
Piston seal
Piston gasket
Mounting nut
Rod end nut
Note
Material
Clear anodized
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Hard chrome plated
Carbon steel
Stainless steel
Phosphate coated
Carbon steel
Urethane
Urethane
NBR
NBR
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Carbon steel

With rubber bumper/Air Cushion/Built-in One-touch Fittings
No. Description Material
14
Rod seal NBR
Part no.
20
25
32
40
PDU-8Z
PDU-10Z
20
25
32
40
HDU-8
HDU-10
HDU-12L
HDU-14
PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
Air-hydro
14
Rod seal NBR
Part no.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
151
Series CM2W
Basic Style (B)
Stroke

H2 G
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)

G
2 x NN
MM
2 x Eh8
AL
A
MM
K
H
S + Stroke
NA

D
CM2WB Bore size
AL
A
H + Stroke
NA
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
JH
With rod boot

(One side)
h
ZZ + Stroke
JW
JH
With rod boot

(Both sides)
8
8
JW
l + Stroke 8
h + Stroke
h
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
45
With air cushion
WA
Cushion needle
N1
G
Cushion needle
N1
G
45
WA
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
22
41
14
32 0.039
FL
H1
H2
KA
MM
NA
NN
ZZ
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
62
144
13
10.5
45
33.5
5.5
M10 x 1.25 15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
62
152
13
10.5
45
37.5
5.5
10 M10 x 1.25 15
64
154
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5
18
14
88
188
12
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
With Rod Boot
M32 x 2
(mm)
ZZ (Both sides)
Bore size (mm) B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
198
224
248
274
324
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
206
232
256
282
332
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
208
234
258
284
334
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
242
268
292
318
368
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
With Rod Boot

Bore size (mm)
34.5 M26 x 1.5
(mm)
ZZ (One side)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
JH
JW
With Air Cushion
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
N1
WA
Bore size (mm)
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
24.5
20
171
184
196
209
234
23.5 10.5
25
17.5
13
25
25
179
192
204
217
242
23.5 10.5
32
17.5
13
32
27
32
181
194
206
219
244
23.5 10.5
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
40
215
228
240
253
278
152
27
10.5

Series CM2W
H + Stroke
G F
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
K
Effective thread
length 2 x FL
I
Width across
flats B2
LT
MM
A
AL
MM
N
S + Stroke
LS + Stroke
CJ1
F G
H2
LH
H
K
A
AL
H1

Stroke
CM2WL Bore size
CJP
4 x LD
CJ2
2 x LC
Z + Stroke
LX
LZ
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
CM2
CG1
With air cushion

WA
Cushion needle
WA
MB
45
MB1
CA2
CS1
N1
N1
CS2

G
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1 B2 D
F FL G
H H1 H2
MM
N NA
NN
20
18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5
8 28 5
4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
25
22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 33.5 5.5 8
4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
32
22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
40
24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4
With Air Cushion
(mm)
30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
N1
WA
Bore size (mm)
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
32
17.5
13
32
27
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
Z ZZ
18
18
62 20 8 21 144
18
14
64 20 8 25 154
62 20 8 25 152
88 23 10 27 188
In the case of with rod boot, refer to basic style on

page 152 and f dimension on page 136.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
153
Series CM2W
Flange Style (F)
Stroke
AL
A
MM
FX
FZ
20 to 32
40
With air cushion

45
2 x NN MM
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
E
I
FY
hole

G
4 x FD 2 x FD
mounting mounting hole

H2 G
Width across
H
1
flats B1
C2
CM2WF Bore size
K
Z
H
FT Width across flats NA

N
S + Stroke
AL
A
H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Cushion needle
WA
WA
N1
N1
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
C2
20
18
15.5
34
13
26
30
FD
FL
FT
FX
FY
FZ
H1
H2
20 0.033
13
10.5
60
75
41
0
0.033
13
10.5
60
75
45
33.5 5.5
KA
28
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
10
M10 x 1.25
12
M14 x 1.5
25
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
10
26
32
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
12
26 0.033
13
10.5
60
75
45
37.5 5.5
47.3
14
0
0.039
16
13.5
66
36
82
11
50
10
46.5
(mm)
40
21
24
52
22
41
32
With Air Cushion
NA
NN
ZZ
Bore size (mm)
N1
WA
Bore size (mm)
20
15
24
M20 x 1.5
62
37
144
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
62
41
152
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
32
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
64
41
154
32
17.5
13
32
27
21.5 42.5
M32 x 2
18
14
88
45
188
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
154
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
40
MM
In the case of with

rod boot, refer to
basic style on page
152 and f dimension
on page 137.

Series CM2W
Trunnion Style (U)

CM2WU Bore size
Stroke
G

2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
E
I
TD
TY
MM
MM
AL
A K
Z
H

TX
TZ
CJ1
Effective thread
length
TT
2 x FL
S + Stroke
CJP
AL
A
CJ2
H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
CM2
CG1
With air cushion
MB
Cushion needle
45
WA
MB1
WA
CA2
CS1
N1
N1
CS2
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
22
41
14
32 0.039
FL
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
62
13
10.5
45
33.5
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
13
10.5
45
37.5
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
64
16
13.5
11
50
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
M32 x 2
18
14
88
(mm)
With Air Cushion
Bore size (mm)
TD
TT
TX
TY
TZ
ZZ
Bore size (mm)
N1
WA
Bore size (mm)
20
10
32
32
52
36
144
20
17.5
13
20
21.5
25
10
40
40
60
40
152
25
17.5
13
25
24.5
32
10
40
40
60
40
154
32
17.5
13
32
27
40
10
11
53
53
77
44.5
188
40
21.5
16
40
11
32.5
(mm)
62
In the case of with

rod boot, refer to
basic style on page
152 and f dimension
on page 141.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
155

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
Series
CM2
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Piping
Mounting style
B
L
F
G
C
D
U
Basic style
Axial foot style
Single clevis style
Double clevis style

FZ
Boss-cut rod side

flange style
UZ
Boss-cut rod side

trunnion style
Rc (Screw-in piping)
Nil

Made to Order
CM2 L 32
With auto switch
150 S
150 S M9BW
CDM2 L 32
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
Bore size

(Example) CDM2F40-100T
20
25
32
40
Number of
auto switches
Action
S Single acting, Spring return
T Single acting, Spring extend
20 mm
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Special function
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
Nil
Yes
Terminal
conduit
No Yes No Yes No
Connector
Yes
Reed switch
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
12V
5V, 12V
24V
1 pc.
Auto switch
40 mm
4-wire (NPN)
Grommet
n pcs.
32 mm
2-wire

2 pcs.
S
n
25 mm
Type
Nil
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W
Without auto switch

to the table below.
Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100V, 200V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
156

Series
CM2
Specifications
20
Bore size (mm)

Action
25
32
Type
Pneumatic
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
Spring return
40
Single acting, Spring return/Single acting, Spring extend
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
Minimum operating Single acting, Spring return

pressure
Single acting, Spring extend
0.18 MPa
CJ1
0.23 MPa
CJP

Lubrication
Spring extend
CJ2
+1.4
0 mm

Piston speed
CM2
50 to 750 mm/s
0.27
0.4
0.65
1.2
CG1
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm)
MB
Standard stroke (mm) (1)
20
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
25
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
32
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
MB1
CA2
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250

Note 2) Please contact SMC for longer strokes.
JIS Symbol
Single acting,
Spring return
CS1
CS2
Mounting Bracket
Spring extend
For the mounting bracket part numbers other than

basic style, refer to page 158.
Theoretical Output
Refer to Theoretical Output 1 on page 1573.
Spring Reaction Force

Refer to page 1570 (Table 3: Spring Reaction Force).

Symbol
Boss-cut style
Specifications

XC3
XC6
Boss for the head side cover bracket is eliminated and the total length of cylinder
is shortened.


auto switches.
Operating range
Comparison of the Full Length Dimension (Versus standard type)
(mm)
D-
Mounting style
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
157
Series
CM2

Accessory
Standard equipment
Mounting Rod end
nut
nut
Mounting
Clevis
pin
Single
knuckle
joint
Option
(4)
Double (3)
Clevis
knuckle
bracket
joint
Basic style
Axial foot style
(1)
Single clevis style
(1)
Double clevis style
(1)
(3)
(5)
(2)
(2)

Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and
double clevis styles.
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for rod side trunnion and head side trunnion
styles.
double clevis and double knuckle joint.
Note 4) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with clevis pivot bracket.

Min.
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Axial foot
CM-L020B
CM-L032B
Flange
CM-F020B
CM-F032B
CM-F040B 1 flange
Single clevis
CM-C020B
CM-C032B
Double clevis
(with pins)
CM-D020B
CM-D032B
CM-D040B
CM-T020B
CM-T032B


158
Accessory Bracket
For mounting brackets, refer to pages 144 and 145

Series
CM2
Mass
Spring Return
(kg)
Mounting
bracket
mass
Option
bracket
(kg)
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
25 stroke
0.20
0.30
0.42
0.77
25 stroke
0.19
0.29
0.40
0.74
50 stroke
0.22
0.33
0.46
0.84
50 stroke
0.21
0.32
0.44
0.81
75 stroke
0.27
0.42
0.58
1.03
75 stroke
0.25
0.39
0.54
0.97
100 stroke
0.29
0.45
0.63
1.09
100 stroke
0.27
0.42
0.58
1.03
125 stroke
0.35
0.54
0.76
1.29
125 stroke
0.32
0.49
0.69
1.20
150 stroke
0.37
0.57
0.80
1.36
150 stroke
0.34
0.52
0.73
1.27
200 stroke
0.97
1.61
200 stroke
0.88
1.49
250 stroke
1.87
250 stroke
1.72
Foot style
0.15
0.16
0.16
0.27
Foot style
0.15
0.16
0.16
0.27
Flange style
0.06
0.09
0.09
0.12
Flange style
0.06
0.09
0.09
0.12
Single clevis style
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.09
Single clevis style
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.09
Double clevis style
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.13
Double clevis style
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.13
Trunnion style
0.04
0.07
0.07
0.10
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.04
0.01
0.02
0.02
0.05
0.07
0.03
0.05
Pivot bracket (With pin)
0.07
0.06
0.07
Bore size (mm)
Basic
mass
Spring Extend
Bore size (mm)
Basic
mass
Mounting
bracket
mass
Trunnion style
0.04
0.07
0.07
0.10
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.04
0.03
0.01
0.02
0.02
0.03
0.07
0.09
0.05
0.07
0.07
0.09
0.05
0.07
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.07
0.14
0.14
Pivot bracket (With pin)
0.07
0.07
0.14
0.14
0.06
0.06
0.23
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.23
0.07
0.07
0.20
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.20
Option
bracket
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
Calculation: (Example) CM2L32-100S (Bore size 32, Foot style, 100 stroke)
0.63 (Basic mass) + 0.16 (Mounting bracket mass) = 0.79 kg
Built-in One-touch Fitting

CM2 Mounting style Bore size
Stroke Action
Built-in One-touch fitting
This type has the One-touch fitting integrated in a cylinder,

which enables to reduce the piping labor and installing space
dramatically.
Specifications
Action
Single acting, Spring return Single acting, Spring extend
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
0.18 MPa
Cushion
Piping
Piston speed
Mounting
0.23 MPa
Rubber bumper
50 to 750 mm/s

Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Applicable tubing
O.D./I.D. (mm)
6/4
6/4
6/4
8/6

polyurethane tubing.
Caution
D-

-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
159
Series
CM2
Precautions
20-CM2 Mounting style Bore size Stroke Action

cathode ray tube.
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front

matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages
3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Operating Precoutions
Warning
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or screwing a
fitting into the port, it is likely to damage the junction part with
cover.
Caution
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
0.18 MPa

Cushion
Rubber bumper
Piston speed
50 to 750 mm/s
0.23 MPa

Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Double clevis style, Rod side trunnion style,
Head side trunnion style, Clevis integrated style,
Boss-cut style
Mounting
Construction
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each other by

caulking method, thus making it impossible to disassemble.
Therefore, internal parts of a cylinder other than rod seal are
not replaceable.
2. Use caution to the popping of a retaining ring.

When replacing rod seals and removing and mounting a
retaining ring, use a proper tool (retaining ring plier: tool for
installing a type C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is used,
it is likely to inflict damage to a human body or peripheral
equipment, as a retaining ring may be flown out of the tip of a
plier. Be much careful with the popping of a retaining ring.
Besides, be certain that a retaining ring is placed firmly into
the groove of rod cover before supplying air at the time of
installment.
3. Do not touch the cylinder during operation.

Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is running at a
high speed and a high frequency, because the surface of a
cylinder tube could get so hot enough as to cause you get
burned.

One-touch fitting is press-fit into the cover, thus cannot be
replaced.
The above shows the case of single acting, spring return type.
160

Series
CM2
Construction
Spring return
CJ1
CJP
Boss-cut style Clevis integrated style
CJ2
CM2
Spring return,
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
Spring extend
CS1
CS2
Clevis integrated
style
Boss-cut
style
Spring extend,
Component Parts
No.
1
2A
2B
2C
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Description
Material
Note
Clear anodized
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Head cover A
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Head cover B
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Head cover C
Aluminum alloy
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Piston
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Piston rod
Hard chromium electroplated
Carbon steel
Bushing
Seal retainer
Stainless steel
Return spring
Zinc chromated
Steel wire
Spring guide
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Spring seat
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Plug with fixed orifice
Black zinc chromated
Alloy steel
Retaining ring
Phosphate coated
Carbon steel
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Description
Clevis bushing
Bumper
Bumper A
Bumper B
Retaining ring
Piston seal
Piston gasket
Wear ring
Mounting nut
Rod end nut
Note
Material
Urethane
Urethane
Urethane
Stainless steel
NBR
NBR
Resin
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
D-
With Rubber Bumper, Built-in One-touch Fitting

23
Rod seal NBR
-X
Part no.
20
25
32
40
PDU-8Z
PDU-10Z
PDU-12LZ
PDU-14LZ
Individual
-X
Technical
data
161
Series CM2
Basic Style (B)
Stroke S
T
CM2B Bore size

Spring return
G
2 x NN
H2
MM
Width across flatsKA
AL
A
K
H
Effective thread
length 2 x FL
NA
2 x Eh8

NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Spring extend
2 x NN
NA
2 x Eh8
MM
AL
A
Width across flatsKA
NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
H + Stroke
Boss-cut style
Spring return ZZ + Stroke

Spring extend ZZ + 2 x Stroke

Spring return
Spring extend
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
14
40
24
21
22
41
FL
H1
H2
KA
MM
NA
NN
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
33.5
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
26 0.033
13
10.5
45
37.5
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
0
0.039
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
32
Dimensions by Stroke
Stroke
Sym
bol
Bore
size (mm)
1 to 50
ZZ
S
(mm)
51 to 100
ZZ
S
101 to 150
ZZ
S
151 to 200
ZZ
S
201 to 250
ZZ
S
M32 x 2
Boss-cut Style
Stroke
Sym
bol
Bore
size (mm)
1 to 50
18
14
34.5 M26 x 1.5
(mm)
51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
20
87
141
112
166
137
191
20
128
153
178
25
87
145
112
170
137
195
25
132
157
182
32
89
147
114
172
139
197
164
222
32
134
159
184
209
40
113
179
138
204
163
229
188
254
213
279
40
163
188
213
238
263

Bore size (mm)
20
21.5
25
24.5
32
27
40
11
32.5
162

CM2
Series

CM2L Bore size
S
T
Stroke
Spring return
H
A
AL
H1
F
H2
2 x NN
(Effective thread length

2 x FL)
LH
2 x LC
4 x LD
MM
N
Y
LT

S + Stroke
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ1
CJP
N
Y
LX
LZ
CJ2
CM2
CG1
Spring extend
MB
H + Stroke
Width across
flats B1
A
AL
H1
F G
H2
2 x NN
MB1
(Effective thread length

2 x FL)
LT
Width across
flats KA
4 x LD
Z + Stroke
CS2

S + Stroke
LS + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
N
Y
CS1
LH
2 x LC
Width across
flats B2
MM
CA2
Y
LX
LZ

Spring return
Spring extend
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B B1
20
18 15.5 40 13
25
22 19.5 47 17
32
22 19.5 47 17
40
K KA LC LD LH LT LX LZ
B2
FL
H1
H2
26
13 10.5
41
28
32 10 13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
32 12 13 10.5
45
24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50
10 46.5
N NA
NN
6.8 25 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
6.8 28 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
37.5 5.5 10
6.8 28 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
12
Stroke
Sym
bol
Bore
size (mm)
MM
(mm)
151 to 200
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
201 to 250
LS S ZZ LS S ZZ LS S ZZ LS S ZZ LS S ZZ
30 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
18
18
20
21
20
25
18
14
20
25
23 10 27

Bore size
(mm)
20
127 87 156 152 112 181 177 137 206
20
21.5
25
127 87 160 152 112 185 177 137 210
25
24.5
32
129 89 162 154 114 187 179 139 212 204 164 237
32
27
40
159 113 196 184 138 221 209 163 246 234 188 271 259 213 296
40
32.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
163
Series CM2
S
T
4 x FD
Mounting hole
AL
A
MM
FX
FZ
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Width across
flats B1
Spring extend
2 x FD
Mounting hole
2 x NN
FT
N
20 to 32
4 x FD
Mounting hole
Width across
flats KA
FY
2 x FD
Mounting hole
40
H2
E
I
Spring return
Stroke
CM2F Bore size
H2
RcP
H1
2 x NN
FY
C2
AL
A
MM
FX
FZ
40
FT
N
K
Z + Stroke
H + Stroke
20 to 32
Width across
flats NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Boss-cut style


Spring return
Spring extend
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A
AL
C2
20
18 15.5 34 13 26 30
25
B1
B2
FD FL FT FX FY FZ
H1
H2
K KA
MM
N NA
NN
10.5
60
75
41
28
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 0.033 13
10.5
60
75
45
33.5 5.5
32
0
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 0.033
13
10.5
60
75
45
37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
40
24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 00.039 16
13.5
66 36 82 11 50
10 46.5
20 0.033 13
Bore
size (mm)
Stroke
Sym
bol
1 to 50
S ZZ
M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
Boss-cut Style
Bore
size (mm)
Stroke
Sym
bol
1 to 50
18
18
37
18
14
41
41
45
(mm)
51 to 100
101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
20
87
141 112 166 137 191
20
128
153
178
25
87
145 112 170 137 195
25
132
157
182
32
89
147 114 172 139 197 164 222
32
134
159
184
209
40
113 179 138 204 163 229 188 254 213 279
40
163
188
213
238
263

Bore size (mm)
20
21.5
25
24.5
32
27
40
32.5
164
(mm)
51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250

S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ

Series
CM2

CM2G Bore size
Stroke
S
T
Spring return
4 x FD
Mounting hole
2 x FD
Mounting hole
H2
C2

H1 2 x NN
FY
E
D
CJ1
CJP
MM
AL
A
K
H
FX
FZ
FT
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
40
CJ2
20 to 32
CM2
ZZ + Stroke
CG1
MB
Spring extend
MB1
2 x NN
Width across
flats B2
H2
CA2
2 x FD
Mounting hole 4 x FD
C2 Mounting hole
CS1
FY
E
D
Width across
flats B1 H1
CS2
MM
AL
A
H + Stroke
FT
S + Stroke
Z + 2 x Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
40
20 to 32

Spring return
Spring extend
FX
FZ
(mm)
E
C2
20
18 15.5 34 13 26 30
25
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 0.033 13
32
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 0.033 13
40
24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 0.039 16
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
FD FL FT FX FY FZ
1 to 50
S
Z ZZ
51 to 100
S
Z ZZ
H1
H2
MM
K KA
N NA
NN
10.5
60
75
41
28
10.5
60
75
45
33.5 5.5
10.5
60
75
45
37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
13.5
66 36
82 11 50
10 46.5
20 0.033 13
Stroke
Sym
bol
Bore
size (mm)
(mm)
151 to 200
101 to 150
S
Z ZZ
ZZ
M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
18
18
18
14
20
87
132 141 112 157 166 137 182 191
201 to 250
S
Z ZZ

20
21.5
25
87
136 145 112 161 170 137 186 195
25
24.5
32
89
138 147 114 163 172 139 188 197 164 213 222
32
27
40
113 168 179 138 193 204 163 218 229 188 243 254 213 268 279
40
32.5
Bore size
(mm)
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
165
Series CM2
CM2C Bore size
S
T
Stroke
Spring return
H1
CD
NN
G
I
E
D
CI
NA
AL
A
MM
CX
K
H
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
NA
L
RR
Spring extend
H1
NN
CD
CI
E
D
NA
AL
A
MM
H + Stroke
S + Stroke
Z + 2 x Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
CX
L
RR
NA

Spring return
Spring extend
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
CD
CI
CX
FL
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
RR
13 10.5
41
28
30
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
14
13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
30
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
14
13 10.5
45
37.5 5.5
10
30
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
14
16 13.5 11
50
46.5
12
39
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
18
14
11
18
20
18 15.5 13
24
10
20 0.033
25
22 19.5 17
30
10
10
26 0.033
32
22 19.5 17
30
10
12
26 0.033
40
24
10
38
15
14
32 0.039
21
22
Bore
size (mm)
166
Stroke
Sym
bol
1 to 50
ZZ
Z
S
(mm)
51 to 100
ZZ
Z
S
151 to 200
101 to 150
ZZ
Z
S
ZZ
201 to 250
ZZ
Z
S
M32 x 2

Bore size
(mm)
20
87
158 167 112 183 192 137 208 217
20
21.5
25
87
162 171 112 187 196 137 212 221
25
24.5
32
89
164 173 114 189 198 139 214 223 164 239 248
32
27
40
113 202 213 138 227 238 163 252 263 188 277 288 213 302 313
40
32.5

Series
CM2

S
T
Stroke
Spring return
+0.058
H1
Axis d9
NN
0.040
0.076
E
D
CI
CD hole H10 0
NA
CM2D Bore size
AL
A
MM
CJ1
CJP
K
H
CX
CZ
CL
NA
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
RR
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
Spring extend
NN
CA2
+0.058
CD hole H10 0
Axis d9
H + Stroke
S + Stroke
Z + 2 x Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
CS2
NA
CI
E
D
AL
A
MM
CS1
0.040
0.076
CX
CZ
CL
NA
L
RR

Spring return
Spring extend
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL
20
18 15.5 13 9 24 25
25
22 19.5 17 9 30 25
32
22 19.5 17 9 30 25
40
CX CZ
10 19
FL
H1
20 0.033
13 10.5
41
28
0
0.033
13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
13 10.5
45
16 13.5 11 50
10 19 10
26
10 19 12
26 0.033
24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14
32 0.039
MM
N NA
NN
30
M8 x 1.25
15 24
M20 x 1.5
14
30
M10 x 1.25
15 30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
14
37.5 5.5 10
30
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5
M26 x 1.5
14
46.5
12
39
M14 x 1.5
21.5 42.5
M32 x 2
18
14
Bore
size (mm)
Stroke
Sym
bol
1 to 50
Z
ZZ
S
K KA
5
7
(mm)
51 to 100
ZZ
Z
S
151 to 200
101 to 150
ZZ
Z
S
ZZ
201 to 250
ZZ
Z
S
RR U
11 18

Bore size
(mm)
20
87
158 167 112 183 192 137 208 217
20
21.5
25
87
162 171 112 187 196 137 212 221
25
24.5
32
89
164 173 114 189 198 139 214 223 164 239 248
32
27
40
113 202 213 138 227 238 163 252 263 188 277 288 213 302 313
40
32.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
167
Series CM2
CM2U Bore size
Stroke
S
T
Spring return

P
2 x NN
E
I
TY
TD
AL
A
MM
TX
TZ
K
Z
TT
Spring extend
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
2 x NN
E
I
TD
TY

Width across
H1
flats B1
MM
AL
A K
TT
Z + Stroke
TX
TZ
S + Stroke
H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Boss-cut style


Spring return
Spring extend
(mm)
B1
B2
20
18 15.5 13
26
20 0.033
25
22 19.5 17
32
10
26 0.033
32
22 19.5 17
32
12
26 0.033
40
24
41
14
32 0.039
Bore size (mm) A
AL
21
22
1 to 50
ZZ
S
51 to 100
S
ZZ
32
52
36
40
40
60
40
40
40
60
40
53
53
77 44.5
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
13 10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
10
32
13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
10
13 10.5
45
37.5 5.5 10
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
10
16 13.5 11
50
46.5
18
14
10
11
Stroke
Sym
bol
Bore
size (mm)
TD TT TX TY TZ
FL
(mm)
101 to 150
ZZ
S
151 to 200
ZZ
S
201 to 250
S ZZ
12
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
M32 x 2
Boss-cut Style
Stroke
Sym
Bore
bol
size (mm)
(mm)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250

ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
20
87
141 112 166 137 191
20
128
153
178
25
87
145 112 170 137 195
25
132
157
182
32
89
147 114 172 139 197 164 222
32
134
159
184
209
40
113 179 138 204 163 229 188 254 213 279
40
163
188
213
238
263
168
Built-in One-touch
Fittings
(mm)
Bore size (mm) P
20
25
32
40
21.5
24.5
27
32.5

Series
CM2

CM2T Bore size
Stroke
S
T
Spring return
2 x NN
Width acros
flats B2
TY
E
D
TD
AL
A
MM
K
H
CJP
TX
TZ
N
TT
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ1
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
Spring extend
G
Width acros
flats B2
2 x NN
MB1
CA2
MM
TD
TY
E
D
AL
A
CS1
CS2
H + Stroke
TT
S + Stroke
TX
TZ
Z + 2 x Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

Spring return
Spring extend
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1
20
18 15.5 13
25
22 19.5 17
32
22 19.5 17
40
24
21
22
FL
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
13 10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
13 10.5
45
37.5 5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
16 13.5 11
50
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
18
14
B2
26
20 0.033
32
10
26 0.033
32
12
26 0.033
41
14
32 0.039
Stroke
Sym
bol
Bore
size (mm)
1 to 50
Z
S
ZZ
51 to 100
Z
S
ZZ
(mm)
101 to 150
Z
S
ZZ
151 to 200
Z
S
ZZ
201 to 250
Z
S
ZZ
M32 x 2
TX TY
TZ
10
32
32
52
10
40
40
60
10
40
40
60
10
11
53
53
77
TD TT
Built-in One-touch
Fittings
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
20
87
133 143 112 158 168 137 183 193
20
21.5
25
87
137 147 112 162 172 137 187 197
25
24.5
32
89
139 149 114 164 174 139 189 199 164 214 224
32
27
40
113 168.5 179 138 193.5 204 163 218.5 229 188 243.5 254 213 268.5
279
40
32.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
169
Series CM2
S
T
Stroke
Spring return
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke
S + Stroke
H
A K
AL
H1
LP
L RR
U
N
G
NA
CX
CD
MM
x LD
NN
LH
E
D
CI
NA
CM2E Bore size

LT
LF
LG
LY
LV
Spring extend
Refer to page 145 for the details of clevis pivot brackets.
LP
L
U
RR
NA
CX
CD
NA
MM
NN
LH
E
D
CI
A
AL
H1
H + Stroke
K
LZ + 2 x Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Z + 2 x Stroke
S + Stroke
N
RcP Plug with fixed orifice
G
x LD

LT
LF
LG
LY
LV

One-touch fitting port size
Spring extend

Spring return
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
CD
CI
CX
20
12
20 0.033
FL
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
RR
13 10.5
41
28
12
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
11.5
13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
12
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
11.5
13 10.5
45
37.5 5.5
10
15
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
16 13.5 11
50
46.5
12
15
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
20
18 15.5 13
25
22 19.5 17
22
12
10
26 0.033
32
22 19.5 17
10
27
20
12
26 0.033
40
24
10
33
20
14
32 0.039
21
22
Bore
size (mm)
Stroke
Sym
bol
1 to 50
ZZ
S
Z
101 to 150
ZZ
Z
S
151 to 200
ZZ
Z
S
12 14.5
201 to 250
ZZ
Z
S
87
140 149 112 165 174 137 190 199
25
87
144 153 112 169 178 137 194 203
32
89
149 161 114 174 186 139 199 211 164 224 236
40
113 178 190 138 203 215 163 228 240 188 253 265 213 278 290
Clevis Pivot Bracket
170
12 14.5
(mm)
51 to 100
ZZ
Z
S
20
Bore size (mm) LD
M32 x 2
18
14
(mm)
LF
LG
LH
LP
LT
LV
LY
Built-in One-touch
Fittings
(mm)
1 to 50
51 to 100
101 to 150
151 to 200
201 to 250
LZ
LZ
LZ
LZ
LZ
Bore size
(mm)
20
6.8
15
30
30
37
3.2 18.4
59
177
202
227
20
21.5
25
6.8
15
30
30
37
3.2 18.4
59
181
206
231
25
24.5
32
15
40
40
50
28
75
199
224
249
274
32
27
40
15
40
40
50
28
75
228
253
278
303
328
40
32.5
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type

Series
CM2K
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Mounting style
Basic style
B
Axial foot style
L
F Rod side flange style
G Head side flange style
Single clevis style
C
Double clevis style
D
U Rod side trunnion style
Boss-cut rod side

flange style
UZ
Boss-cut rod side

trunnion style
CJP

FZ
CJ1
CJ2
Cushion
Bore size
20 20 mm
25 25mm
32 32 mm
40 40 mm
Nil
Rubber bumper
Air cushion
CM2
CG1
Made to Order
MB
CM2K L 40 150 A
With auto switch
MB1
CDM2K L 40 150 A
None
Nil
2 pcs.
Nylon tarpaulin
S
n
1 pc.
Nil
J
K
CS1
Number of
auto switches
Rod boot
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
CA2
M9BW

auto switch.
(Example) CDM2KF32-100
CS2
n pcs.
Auto switch
Nil
Without auto switch

to the table below.
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
DC
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
No Yes No Yes No
Yes
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Connector
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
12V
4-wire (NPN)
Grommet
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire

Reed switch
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
5V, 12V
24V
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100V, 200V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
171
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series
CM2K
Specifications
A cylinder which rod does not

rotate because of the hexagonal
rod shape.
Non-rotating accuracy
20, 25
0.7
32, 40
0.5
Can operate without
lubrication.
The same installation
dimensions as the standard
cylinder.
Auto switches can also be
mounted.
It can be installed with auto switches to
simplify the detection of the stroke position
of the cylinder.
JIS Symbol
Double acting,
Single rod
20
Bore size (mm)
25
32
40
Rod non-rotating accuracy

Pneumatic
Type
Action
Air
Fluid
Rubber bumper
Cushion
1.5 MPa
Proof pressure
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa

Lubrication
+1.4
0
mm
50 to 500 mm/s
Piston speed
Cusion

Rubber bumper
0.27 J
0.4 J
0.65 J
1.2 J
0.54 J
(11.0)
0.78 J
(11.0)
1.27 J
(11.0)
2.35 J
(11.8)
Allowable
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
Rod Boot Material
Standard stroke
(mm)
Symbol
Note)
20
25
32
Rod boot material
Nylon tarpaulin
Maximum ambient temperature for the rod

boot itself.
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150

200, 250, 300
40

Symbol
Specifications
Note 1) Other intermediate strokes can be manufactured

upon receipt of order.
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm
intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Note 2) The maximum limit is 1000 stroke, but the products that exceed the standard stroke might not
be able to fulfill the specifications.

XB6

XC3
XC6
XC8
Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extention type

Min.
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Axial foot
CM-L020B
CM-L032B
XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type
Flange
CM-F020B
CM-F032B
CM-F040B 1 flange
CM-C020B
CM-C032B
Single clevis
Double clevis
(with pins)
CM-D020B
CM-D032B
CM-D040B
CM-T020B
CM-T032B
XC9



Boss-cut style
Boss for the head side cover bracket is
eliminated and the total length of cylinder
is shortened.

auto switches.
Operating range
172
Comparison of the Full Length Dimension (Versus standard type)
Mounting style
(mm)
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Road Type

Series
CM2K
20-CM2K Mounting style Bore size
Precautions
Stroke

Precautions.

cathode ray tube.
CJ1
CJP
Warning
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or
screwing a fitting into the port, it is likely to damage
the junction part with cover.
2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in a fully
closed condition.
cushion seal to be damaged. When adjusting the
cushion needle, use the Hexagon wrench key:
nominal size 1.5.
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)
Cushion
Piston speed

20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Rubber bumper
50 to 500 mm/s
3. Do not open the cushion needle wide

excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be completely
wide (more than 3 turns from fully closed), it would
be equivalent to the cylinder with no cushion, thus
making the impacts extremely high. Do not use it in
such a way. Besides, using with fully open could
give damage to the piston or cover.

style, Head side trunnion style, Rod side trunnion style,
Mounting
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1

Accessory
Standard equipment
Mounting Rod end
nut
nut
Clevis
pin
Option
(4)
Single Double (3)
Clevis
knuckle knuckle
Rod boot
joint
joint
bracket
Mounting
Basic style
Axial foot style
(1)
(1)
Single clevis style
(1)
(5)
Double clevis style (3)
(2)
(2)
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and
double clevis styles.
double clevis and double knuckle joint.
Mass
Bore size (mm)
Basic style
Axial foot style
Flange style
Single clevis style
Basic
mass
Double clevis style
Trunnion style
Option
bracket
(kg)
20
25
32
40
0.14
0.29
0.20
0.12
0.18
0.19
0.18
0.13
0.19
0.17
0.04
0.07
0.06
0.07
0.21
0.37
0.30
0.19
0.25
0.27
0.28
0.19
0.28
0.26
0.07
0.07
0.06
0.07
0.28
0.44
0.37
0.27
0.32
0.33
0.34
0.26
0.35
0.32
0.09
0.14
0.06
0.07
0.57
0.84
0.69
0.53
0.66
0.70
0.67
0.53
0.66
0.63
0.14
0.14
0.23
0.20
Caution
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that
rotational torque would be applied to the piston
rod.
If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide
will become deformed, thus affecting the nonrotating accuracy.
Refer to the table below for the approximate values
of the allowable range of rotational torque.
Allowable rotational torque
20
25
32
40
(Nm or less)
0.2
0.25
0.25
0.44
CS2
To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded

portion at the tip of the piston rod, make sure to
retract the piston rod entirely, and place a wrench
over the flat portion of the rod that protrudes.
Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the
tightening torque from being applied to the nonrotating guide.
2. When replacing rod seals, please contact SMC.

Air leakage may be happened, depending on the
position in which a rod seal is fitted. Thus, please
contact SMC when replacing them.
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each
other by caulking method, thus making it impossible
to disassemble. Therefore, internal parts of a
cylinder other than rod seal are not replaceable.
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is
running at a high speed and a high frequency,
because the surface of a cylinder tube could get so
hot enough as to cause you get burned.
5. Combine the rod end section, so that a rod boot
might not be twisted.
If a rod boot is installed with being twisted when
installing a cylinder, it will cause a rod boot to fail
during operation.
D-
-X
Calculation: (Example) CM2KL32-100

Additional mass0.09/0.50 stroke
Cylinder stroke 100 stroke
0.44 + 0.09 x 100/50 = 0.62 kg
Individual
-X
Technical
data
173
Series
CM2K
Construction
Rubber bumper
Rod section
With air cushion
Rod section
Component Parts
No.
1
2A
2B
2C
3
4
5
Description
Rod cover
Head cover A
Head cover B
Head cover C
Cylinder tube
Piston
Piston rod
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Non-rotating guide
7
8
Seal retainer
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Clevis bushing
Copper oil-impregnated
sintered alloy
Bumper A
Bumper B
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Chromated
sintered alloy
10
11
Note
Clear anodized
Description
Retaining ring
Piston seal
Piston gasket
Wear ring
Mounting nut
Rod end nut
Material
Stainless steel
NBR
NBR
Resin
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Note
Nickel plated
Nickel plated

Nickel plated
Phosphate coated
Urethane
Urethane
174
No.
12
13
14
15
16
17
With rubber bumper / With air cushion

18 Rod seal
NBR
Part no.
20
25
32
40
PDR-8W
PDR-10W
PDR-12W
PDR-14W
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Road Type

CM2K
Series
Basic Style (B)

CM2KB Bore size
Stroke

2 x RcP
2 x NN
MM
AL
A
Width across flats KB
Effective
thread length
2 x FL
CJ1
NA
CJP
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
NA
2 x Eh8
CJ2
With rod boot
CM2
Boss-cut style
l
CG1
JH
MB
MB1
ZZ + Stroke
f
h
CA2
JW
ZZ + Stroke
CS1
Cushion needle
With air cushion
45
WA
Cushion needle
45
WA
N1
CS2
N1
(mm)
FL
H1
H2
KB
MM
NA
NN
13
10.5
41
28
8.2
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
260.033
13
10.5
45
33.5 10.2
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
0
0.033
13
10.5
45
37.5 12.2
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5 M26 x 1.5
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5 14.2 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
200.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
32
22
19.5
17
32
26
40
24
21
22
41
320.039
M32 x 2
With Rod Boot

h
ZZ
B3
20
30
36
18
68
81
93
106
131 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
143
156
168
181
206 23.5 10.5
25
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
147
160
172
185
210 23.5 10.5
32
32
36
18
72
85
97
110
135 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
149
162
174
187
212 23.5 10.5
40
41
46
20
77
90
102
115
140 12.5
25
37.5
50
75
181
194
206
219
244
Bore
size (mm)
ke
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
Boss-cut Style
Bore size
(mm)
ZZ
62
116
62
120
64
122
88
154
(mm)
Symbol
Stro
(mm)
ZZ
With rod boot
Without
rod boot 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
JH
27
JW
10.5
With Air Cushion (mm)

Bore size (mm)
N1
WA
20
17.5
13
25
17.5
13
20
103
130
143
155
168
193
32
17.5
13
25
107
134
147
159
172
197
40
21.5
16
32
109
136
149
161
174
199
40
138
165
178
190
203
228
D-
-X
Dimensions of Each Mounting Bracket

The dimensions are the same as standard type, double acting, single rod, except the configuration of the piston rod. Refer to pages 136 to 143. Specifications for the
auto switch equipped type are the same as Series CDM2 standard type.
175
Individual
-X
Technical
data

Series
CM2KW
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Mounting style
B
L
F
U
Basic style
Cushion
Axial foot style

Flange style
Trunnion style
Nil
Rubber bumper
Air cushion
Made to Order
CM2KW L 40 150 A
With auto switch
CDM2KW L 40 150 A M9BW
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
Number of
auto switches
Bore size
Non-rotating rod type
20
25
32
40
20 mm
Nil
2 pcs.
25 mm
S
n
n pcs.
32 mm
1 pc.
40 mm
Auto switch

auto switch.
(Example) CDM2KWF32-100
Without auto switch

Nil
For the applicable auto switch model,
refer to the table below.
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Reed switch
Grommet
No Yes No Yes No
Yes

Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
2-wire
12V
4-wire (NPN)
5V, 12V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
24V
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
A96
IC circuit
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100V, 200V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
176

CM2KW
Series
Specifications

rod shape.
20, 250.7
32, 400.5
Can operate without
lubrication.
cylinder.
mounted.
of the cylinder.
JIS Symbol
Double acting,
Double rod
20
Bore size (mm)
25
32
40

Pneumatic
Action
Rubber bumper
Cushion
Action
Air
Fluid
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.08 MPa
Without auto switch: 10 to +70C (No freezing)

With auto switch: 10 to +60C (No freezing)
CJ1
CJP
Lubrication
CJ2
+1.4
0
mm
50 to 500 mm/s
Piston speed
0.27 J
Allowable kinetic energy
0.4 J
0.65 J
CM2
1.2 J
CG1
Standard Stroke
Bore size
(mm)
MB
Accessory Bracket
Standard stroke Note)

(mm)
Refer to pages 144 and 145 for

accessory bracket, since it is the same
as standard type, double acting, single
rod.
20
25
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
32
200, 250, 300
MB1
CA2
CS1
40
Note 2) The maximum limit is 500 stroke, but the products that exceed the
standard stroke might not be able to fulfill the specifications.
CS2

Symbol
Specifications
XB6
XC3
XC6


Accessory
Mounting
Mounting
nut
Rod end
nut
(1 pc.)
(2 pcs.)
Axial foot style
(2)
(2)
Flange style
(1)
(2)
Basic style
Option
Standard equipment
(2)
Single knuckle Double knuckle

joint
joint
(2)
(1) (1)
Trunnion style
Note 1) Trunnion nuts are attached for trunnion style.
double knuckle joint.

Operating range
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
177
Series
CM2KW
Mass
(kg)
20
25
32
40
Basic style
0.16
0.25
0.32
0.66
Axial foot style
0.31
0.41
0.48
0.93
Flange style
0.22
0.34
0.41
0.78
Trunnion style
0.20
0.32
0.38
0.76
Bore size (mm)
Basic
mass
Option
bracket
0.06
0.1
0.14
0.20
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.23
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.20
Calculation: (Example) CM2KWL32-100

0.48 (Foot, 32)
Basic mass
0.14/50 st
Additional mass
Cylinder stroke: 100 st
0.48 + 0.14 x 100/50 = 0.76 kg

Bore size (mm)
Min.
20
25 32
40
Axial foot
2
CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B 2 foot, 1 mounting nut
Flange
1
CM-F020B CM-F032B CM-F040B 1 flange
1
CM-T020B CM-T032B CM-T040B 1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer
to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety
Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Warning
2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in
a fully closed condition.
the cushion needle, use the Hexagon wrench
key: nominal size 1.5.
3. Do not open the cushion needle wide
excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be completely
wide (more than 3 turns from fully closed), it
would be equivalent to the cylinder with no
cushion, thus making the impacts extremely
high. Do not use it in such a way. Besides,
using with fully open could give damage to the
piston or cover.
Caution
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way
that rotational torque would be applied to
the piston rod.
If rotational torque is applied, the nonrotating guide will become deformed, thus
affecting the non-rotating accuracy.
Refer to the table below for the approximate
values of the allowable range of rotational
torque.
Allowable rotational torque 20
(Nm or less)
0.2
25
32
40
0.25
0.25
0.44
To screw a bracket or a nut onto the

threaded portion at the tip of the piston rod,
make sure to retract the piston rod entirely,
and place a wrench over the flat portion of
the rod that protrudes.
Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent
the tightening torque from being applied to
the non-rotating guide.
2. When replacing rod seals, please contact

SMC.
Air leakage may be happened, depending on
the position in which a rod seal is fitted. Thus,
please contact SMC when replacing them.
you get burned.
5. Combine the rod end section, so that a
rod boot might not be twisted.
178

Series
CM2KW
With Air Cushion
CM2KW Mounting style Bore size Stroke A Rod boot
20-CM2KW Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
With air cushion

The cushion mechanism is provided for covers in both sides to
absorb the impacts when operating at a high speed, thus giving
no vibrations to a surrounding area and a long service life
brought to cylinder.

Refer to page 147 for the specifications and allowable kinetic energy
since this cylinder has the same specification as the double acting
double rod model.
Refer to page 147 for the specifications since this cylinder has the
same specification as the double acting double rod model.
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
Construction
CM2
Rubber bumper
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
Rod section
With air cushion
Rod section
Component Parts
No.
1
Description
Rod cover
Material
Note
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Piston rod A
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
Piston rod B
Bushing
Non-rotating guide
Seal retainer A
Stainless steel
Seal retainer B
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
10
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Phosphate coated
11
Bumper A
Urethane
12
Bumper B
Urethane
13
Piston seal
NBR
14
Piston gasket
NBR
15
mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
16
Rod end nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Stainless steel

With Rubber Bumper, With Air Cushion, Built-in One-touch Fittings
Bore size (mm)
32
40
20
25
17 Rod seal A NBR
PDU-8Z
PDU-10Z
18 Rod seal B NBR
PDR-8W
PDR-10W PDR-12W PDR-14W
PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
179
Series
CM2KW
Basic Style (B)

CM2KWB Bore size
Stroke

2 x RcP
2 x NN
MM
MM
AL
A
With air cushion
K
H
S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
NA
2 x Eh8

2 x FL
H + Stroke
Cushion needle
45
NA
Cushion needle
WA
WA
AL
A
45
(mm)
Bore size
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
40
24
21
22
41
14
With Air Cushion
FL
H1
H2
KA
KB
MM
NA
NN
20 0.033 13
0
26 0.033 13
10.5
41
28
8.2
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
10.5
45
33.5 5.5
10.2 M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
0
26 0.033
0
32 0.033
13
10.5
45
37.5 5.5
10
12.2 M10 x 1.25
15
34.5 M26 x 1.5
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5
12
14.2 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
E
0
ZZ
62
144
62
152
64
154
88
188
(mm)
Bore size
WA
20
17.5
13
25
17.5
13
32
17.5
13
40
21.5
16
Dimensions of Each Mounting Bracket

External dimensions of each mounting bracket other than basic style are the same as standard type, double acting, double rod (except KA dimensions). Refer
to pages 153 to 155.
180

Series
CM2K
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Mounting style
Basic style
B
Axial foot style
L
Single clevis style
C
Double clevis style
D
UZ
CJP

FZ
CJ1
CJ2
Action
S
T
Boss-cut rod side

flange style
CM2
Single acting, Spring return

Single acting, Spring extend
CG1
Boss-cut rod side

trunnion style
Made to Order
MB
CM2K L 32 150 S
With auto switch
MB1
CA2
CDM2K L 32 150 S M9BW
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
Bore size

(Example) CDM2KF32-100T
20
25
32
40
CS1
Number of
auto switches
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
1 pc.
20 mm
25 mm
CS2
n pcs.
32 mm
Auto switch
40 mm
Without auto switch

Nil
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
DC
5 V, 12 V
2-wire
12 V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24 V
No Yes No Yes No
Yes
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Connector
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
5 V, 12 V
12 V
5 V, 12 V
12 V
4-wire (NPN)
Grommet
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
2-wire

Reed switch
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
5 V, 12 V
24 V
5V
12 V
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
A96
IC circuit
100 V
100 V or less
100 V, 200 V
200 V or less
24 V or less
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100 V, 200 V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
181
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series
CM2K
Specifications

rod shape.
20, 25
0.7
32, 40
0.5
Can operate without
lubrication.
cylinder.
mounted.
of the cylinder.
JIS Symbol
Single acting,
Spring return
20
Bore size (mm)
25
32
40

Spring acting, Spring return/Spring extend
Action
Fluid
Air
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
Spring return
Minimum
operating pressure
Spring extend
0.18 MPa
0.23 MPa

Lubrication

+1.4
0 mm
50 to 500 mm/s
Piston speed
0.27 J
0.4 J
0.65 J
1.2 J
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm)
Spring extend
Standard stroke (mm)
Note)
20
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
25
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
32
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250

Note 2) Please contact SMC for longer strokes.

Mounting Bracket Part No.

Min.
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Axial foot
CM-L020B
CM-L032B
Flange
CM-F020B
CM-F032B
CM-F040B 1 flange
XC3
CM-C020B
CM-C032B
Single clevis
Double clevis
(with pins)
XC6
CM-D020B
CM-D032B
CM-D040B
CM-T020B
CM-T032B
Symbol
XC27
Specifications
Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin

made of stainless steel

1 clevis pin, 2 retaining rings

Theoretical Output
Refer to Theoretical Output 1 on page 1573.
Spring Reaction Force

Refer to Spring Reaction Force 3 on page 1570.
Precautions
Precautions.
Boss-cut style
Boss for the head side cover bracket is
eliminated and the total length of cylinder is
shortened.

auto switches.
Operating range
182
Comparison of the Full Length Dimension

(Versus standard type) (mm)
Mounting style

Series
CM2K

Accessory
Standard equipment
Mounting
nut
Mounting
Rod end
nut
Option
Clevis
pin
Single
knuckle
joint
Double (3)
knuckle
joint
(4)
Clevis
bracket
Basic style
Axial foot style
CJ1

(1)
Single clevis style
(1)
Double clevis style
(3)
CJP
(5)
(1)
CJ2
(2)
(2)
CM2
CG1

MB
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached for clevis integrated style, single clevis, and double clevis
styles.
Note 3) Pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size 40) are shipped together with double
clevis and double knuckle joint.
MB1
CA2
CS1
Mass
CS2
Spring Return/( ): Denotes Spring Extend.

20
25
32
40
25 stroke
0.20 (0.19)
0.31 (0.30)
0.43 (0.41)
0.78 (0.75)
50 stroke
0.23 (0.21)
0.34 (0.33)
0.48 (0.45)
0.86 (0.83)
75 stroke
0.29 (0.25)
0.43 (0.41)
0.61 (0.56)
1.08 (0.99)
100 stroke
0.31 (0.27)
0.47 (0.44)
0.66 (0.60)
1.14 (1.06)
125 stroke
0.37 (0.32)
0.56 (0.52)
0.81 (0.72)
1.34 (1.23)
150 stroke
0.39 (0.34)
0.59 (0.55)
0.85 (0.76)
1.39 (1.31)
200 stroke
()
()
1.04 (0.92)
1.71 (1.54)
250 stroke
()
()
()
2.00 (1.78)
Foot style
0.15 (0.15)
0.16 (0.16)
0.16 (0.16)
0.27 (0.27)
Flange style
0.06 (0.06)
0.09 (0.09)
0.09 (0.09)
0.12 (0.12)
Single clevis style
0.04 (0.04)
0.04 (0.04)
0.04 (0.04)
0.09 (0.09)
Double clevis style
0.05 (0.05)
0.06 (0.06)
0.06 (0.06)
0.13 (0.13)
Trunnion style
0.04 (0.04)
0.07 (0.07)
0.07 (0.07)
0.10 (0.10)
Integral clevis style
0.02 (0.02)
0.02 (0.02)
0.01 (0.01)
0.04 (0.04)
0.01 (0.01)
0.02 (0.02)
0.02 (0.02)
0.03 (.03)
0.05 (0.05)
0.07 (0.07)
0.07 (0.07)
0.09 (0.09)
0.03 (0.03)
0.05 (0.05)
0.05 (0.05)
0.07 (0.07)
0.07 (0.07)
0.07 (0.07)
0.14 (0.14)
0.14 (0.14)
0.06 (0.06)
0.06 (0.06)
0.06 (0.06)
0.23 (0.23)
0.07 (0.07)
0.07 (0.07)
0.07 (0.07)
0.20 (0.20)
Bore size (mm)
Basic
mass
Mounting
bracket
mass
Option
bracket
(kg)
Calculation:
(Example) CM2KL32-100S (Bore size 32, Foot style, 100 stroke)
0.66 (Basic mass) + 0.16 (Mounting bracket mass) = 0.82 kg
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
183
Series
CM2K
20-CM2K Mounting style Bore size
Stroke Action
changing the copper based materials into electroless nickel plated
treatment or non-copper materials in order to eliminate the effects by
copper based ions or fluororesins over the color cathode ray tube.
Specifications
Action
20, 25, 32, 40
Bore size (mm)
1.0 MPa

0.18 MPa
50 to 500 mm/s
Piston speed
Mounting
0.23 MPa
Rubber bumper
Cushion

Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Double clevis style, Rod side trunnion style,
Head side trunnion style, Clevis integrated style,
Boss-cut style
Construction
Spring return
Rod section
Spring extend
Rod section
Component Parts
No.
1
2A
2B
2C
3
4
5
6
Description
Rod cover
Head cover A
Head cover B
Head cover C
Cylinder tube
Piston
Piston rod
Non-rotating guide
Material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
Note
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Clear anodized
Chromated
sintered alloy
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Seal retainer
7
Zinc chromated
Steel wire
Return spring
8
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Spring guide
9
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Spring seat
10
Alloy steel
11
No.
12
Description
Retaining ring
13
Clevis bushing
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Bumper
Bumper A
Bumper B
Retaining ring
Piston seal
Piston gasket
Wear ring
Mounting nut
Rod end nut
Note
Phosphate coated
Material
Carbon steel
sintered alloy
Urethane
Urethane
Urethane
Stainless steel
NBR
NBR
Resin
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Replacement Parts: Seal

23
Rod seal
NBR
Part no.
20
25
32
40
PDR-8W
PDR-10W
PDR-12W
PDR-14W
*Since the seal kit does not include a grease pack, order it separately.
Grease pack part no.:GR-S-010(10g)
184

CM2K
Series
Basic Style (B)

CM2KB Bore size
Stroke
S
T
Spring return
Width
Width across flats KB across
flats B2 H2 G Plug with fixed orifice
2 x NN
RcP
MM
AL
A
2 x FL
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ1
NA
2 x Eh8
CJP
NA
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
Spring extend
MB1
CA2
RcP
2 x NN
MM
CS1
CS2
NA
2 x Eh8

Effective thread
length
AL
A
2 x FL
N
S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
H + Stroke
NA
Boss-cut style

(mm)
E
Bore size
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
32
26 0.033
40
24
21
22
41
32 0.039
0
0
0
0
FL
H1
H2
KB
MM
NA
NN
13
10.5
41
28
8.2
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
33.5
10.2
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
37.5
12.2
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5
14.2
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
M32 x 2
Bore size
Stroke
Sym
bol
1 to 50
ZZ
S
(mm)
51 to 100
ZZ
S
101 to 150
ZZ
S
151 to 200
ZZ
S
201 to 250
ZZ
S
20
87
141
112
166
137
191
25
87
145
112
170
137
195
32
89
147
114
172
139
197
164
222
40
113
179
138
204
163
229
188
254
213
279
Boss-cut Style
Bore size
20
25
32
40
Stroke
Sym
bol
1 to 50
P
8
8
8
4
(mm)
51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
128
153
178
132
157
182
134
159
184
209
163
188
213
238
263
D-
-X
External dimensions of each mounting bracket other than basic style are the same as standard
type, single acting, spring return/spring extend (except piston rod configuration). Refer to pages
163 to 170.
Specifications with auto switch are the same as standard type (CDM2- S/T).
185
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount Type

Series
CM2R
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Nil
Cushion
Nil
Rubber bumper
Type
Air cushion
Air-hydro cylinder: Rubber

bumper only
Pneumatic
Air-hydro
Made to Order
CM2
With auto switch
R A 20 100 A
CDM2
R A 20 100 A M9BW
Number of
auto switches
Mounting style
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
A Bottom mounting style

B Front mounting style
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
Bore size

auto switch.
(Example) CDM2RB32-100
20
25
32
40
1 pc.
Auto switch
20 mm
Without auto switch

Nil
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Reed switch
Grommet
No Yes No Yes No
Yes

Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
2-wire
12V
4-wire (NPN)
5V, 12V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
24V
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
100V, 200V
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
186

Series CM2R direct mount

cylinder can be installed
directly through the use of a
square rod cover.
Space saving has been realized.
Because it is a directly mounted style
without using brackets, its overall length is
shorter, and its installation pitch can be
made smaller. Thus, the space that is
required for installation has been
dramatically reduced.
Improved installation
accuracy and strength
A centering boss has been provided to

improve the installation accuracy. Also,
because it is the directly mounted style,
the strength has been increased.
Series
CM2R
Specifications
20
Bore size (mm)
25
Action
32
40
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Without auto switch: 10 to 70C (No freezing)
With auto switch: 10 to 60C (No freezing)

Lubrication
CJ1

+1.4
0 mm

Piston speed
Rubber bumper: 50 to 750 mm/s, Air cusion: 50 to 1000 mm/s
Cushion

Rubber bumper
Allowable
CJ2
0.27 J
0.4 J
0.65 J
1.2 J
0.54 J
(11.0)
0.78 J
(11.0)
1.27 J
(11.0)
2.35 J
(11.8)
Two styles of installation
Two styles of installations are available

and can be selected according to the
purpose: the front mounting style or the
bottom mounting style.
Front mounting style
CM2
CG1
MB
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm)
Maximum manufacturable stroke (mm)(2)
20
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
1000
25
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
1500
32
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
2000
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
2000
MB1
CA2
CS1

Note 2) Refer to next page for Precations.
Bottom mounting style
CJP
CS2
Tightening Torque: Tighten the cylinder mounting bolts for the bottom mounting
Style (Series CM2RA) with the following tightening torque.
JIS Symbol
Double acting
Bore size (mm)
Hexagon socket head cap screw size
Tightening torque(N m)
20
M5 x 0.8
2.4 to 3.6
25
M6
4.2 to 6.2
32
M8
10.0 to 15.0
40
M10
19.6 to 29.4

Symbol

Operating range
Specifications

XB6
Heat resistant cylinder (150C)
XB7
XB9
XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)

XC3
XC5
XC6
XC8
XC9
D-

XC12 Tandem cylinder
-X

Individual
-X

Technical
data
187
CM2R
Series
Accessory
Accessory
Option
Standard equipment
Rod end nut
Mounting

Knuckle pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for 40) are shipped together.
Mass
(kg)
20
25
32
40
0.14
0.23
0.32
0.62
0.14
0.22
0.32
0.61
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.13
Bore size (mm)

Basic mass
Calculation: (Example)CM2RA32-100
(32, 100 stroke, Bottom mounting)
Basic mass0.32kg
Additional mass0.08kg
Cylinder stroke100mm
0.32 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 0.48kg
Clean Series
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front
matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages
3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
10-CM2R Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
Clean Series (with relief port)
The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room
graded Class 100 by making an actuators rod section a double
seal construction and discharging by relief port directly to the
outside of clean room.
Warning
If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or screwing a
fitting into the port, it is likely to damage the junction part with
cover.
2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in a fully closed
condition.
Using it in the fully closed state will cause the cushion seal to
be damaged. When adjusting the cushion needle, use the
Hexagon wrench key: nominal size 1.5.
3. Do not open the cushion needle wide excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be completely wide (more
than 3 turns from fully closed), it would be equivalent to the
cylinder with no cushion, thus making the impacts extremely
high. Do not use it in such a way. Besides, using with fully open
could give damage to the piston or cover.
4. In the case of exceeding the standard stroke length,
implement an intermediate support.
When using cylinder with longer stroke, implement an
intermediate support for preventing the joint of rod cover and
cylinder tube from being broken by vibration or external load.
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Cushion
Relief port size
M5 x 0.8
Piston speed
30 to 400 mm/s
Mounting
Bottom mounting style, Front mounting style
Construction
Caution
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each other by
caulking method, thus making it impossible to disassemble.
Therefore, internal parts of a cylinder other than rod seal are
not replaceable.
2. Use caution to the popping of a retaining ring.
When replacing rod seals and removing and mounting a
retaining ring, use a proper tool (retaining ring plier: tool for
installing a type C retaining ring). Even if a proper tool is used,
it is likely to inflict damage to a human body or peripheral
equipment, as a retaining ring may be flown out of the tip of a
plier. Be much careful with the popping of a retaining ring.
Besides, be certain that a retaining ring is placed firmly into
the groove of rod cover before supplying air at the time of
installment.
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is running at a
high speed and a high frequency, because the surface of a
cylinder tube could get so hot enough as to cause you get
burned.
4. Do not use an air cylinder as an air-hydro cylinder.
If it uses turbine oil in place of fluids for cylinder, it may result
in oil leakage.
188
M5 x 0.8
Relief port
GC
M5 x 0.8
Relief port
GC
(mm)
Bore size (mm) GC
20
6
6
25
7
32
9
40

Air-hydro
CM2HR Mounting style Bore size
Series
CM2R
Stroke
Air-hydro
A low hydraulic pressure cylinder used at a pressures of 1.0
MPa or below.
intermediate stop, just like a hydraulic unit, while using
pneumatic equipment such as a valve.
20-CM2R Mounting style Bore size Stroke

cathode ray tube.
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Specifications
Air-hydro
Type
Turbine oil
Fluid
Action
20, 25, 32, 40
Bore size (mm)
1.5 MPa
Proof pressure
1.0 MPa
0.18 MPa
15 to 300 mm/s
Piston speed
Rubber bumper
Cushion
Thread tolerance
+1.4
mm
0
Mounting
Auto switches can be mounted. Dimensions are the same as the standard
type of Series CM2R.
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)
CG1
MB
20, 25, 32, 40

1.0 MPa
MB1
0.05 MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Piston speed
50 to 750 mm/s
CA2
CS1
Mounting
CS2

Since the dimensions of mounting style is the same as pages 191and 192, refer
to those pages.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
189
Series
CM2R
Construction
Rubber bumper
Air-hydro
With air cushion
Component Parts
No.
Description
Material
Note
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Head cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Piston rod
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
Bushing
Seal retainer
Retaining ring
Bumper A
Urethane
10
Bumper B
Urethane
11
Retaining ring
12
Piston seal
13
Piston gasket
NBR
14
Wear ring
Resin
15
Rod end nut

16
Rod seal
NBR
Stainless steel
Carbon steel
Phosphate coated
25
32
PDU-8Z
PDU-10Z
20
25
32
40
HDU-8
HDU-10
HDU-12L
HDU-14
40
PDU-12LZ PDU-14LZ
16
Rod seal
NBR
Part no.
Stainless steel
NBR
Carbon steel
Part no.
20
Air-hydro
Nickel plated
For proper auto switch mounting position (at stroke end), refer to pages 215
to 217, since the operating range is the same as standard type, single rod.
190
With Rubber Bumper, With Air Cushion

Series
CM2R
Bottom Mounting Style

CM2RA Bore size
Stroke
X
2 x LD
2 x RcP
GA
Y
GB
H1
MM
LH
ND
D
CJ1
Width across
flats KA
LX
L
CJP
CJ2
AL
A K
H
NB
NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CM2
CG1
With air cushion
MB
MB1
Cushion needle
13
Cushion needle
WA
CA2
45
WB
CS1
CS2
NB
NA
(mm)
Bore size
Stroke range
20
1 to 150
25
1 to 200
32
1 to 200
40
1 to 300
(mm)
Bore size
B1
GA GB
H1
KA
20
18 15.5 30.3 13
22
27
28
33.5
25
22 19.5 36.3 17
10
22
31
33.5 5.5
39
32
22 19.5 42.3 17
12
22
31
37.5 5.5
10
47
40
24
21 52.3 22
14
27
11
34
46.5
AL
With Air Cushion
12 58.5
LD
5.5, 9.5 counterbore
depth 6.5
6.6, 11 counterbore
depth 7.5
9, 14 counterbore
depth 10
11, 17.5 counterbore
depth 12.5
LH LX
MM
NA NB
76
39
12 103
1
8
0
1
26 0.033 8
0
32 0.039 1 4
ND
0
P
1
ZZ
15
21
M8 x 1.25
24
29
15 20 0.033
18
25
M10 x 1.25
30
29
15 26 0.033
76
43
12 107
21
30
M10 x 1.25 34.5 29
15
78
43
12 109
26
38
M14 x 1.5 42.5 37.5 21.5
104 49
15 138
(mm)
Bore size
NA
NB
WA
WB
20
31.5
17.5
27
13
8.5
25
31.5
17.5
27
13
10.5
32
31.5
17.5
27
13
11.5
40
37.5
21.5
32
16
15
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
191
Series
CM2R
Front Mounting Style

CM2RB Bore size
4 x FF
Stroke
Width across
flats B1
GB
2 x RcP
H1
F
FX
ND
D
MM
GA
Width across
flats KA
FX
F
AL
K
A
H
NB
NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
With air cushion

Cushion needle
13
WA
WB
Cushion needle
45
NB
NA
Bore size
(mm)
Stroke range
20
1 to 150
25
1 to 200
32
1 to 200
40
1 to 300
(mm)
H1
KA
MM
NA
NB
27
28
M8 x 1.25
24
29
22
31
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
30
29
15 20 0.033
0
15 26 0.033
22
31
37.5 5.5
10
M10 x 1.25 34.5
27
11
34
46.5
Bore size
AL
B1
FF
FX
GA GB
20
18
15.5
13
30.4
M5 x 0.8 depth 9
22
22
25
22
19.5
17
10
36.4
M6 x 1 depth 11
26
32
22
19.5
17
12
42.4
M6 x 1 depth 11
30
40
24
21
22
14
52.4 M8 x 1.25 depth 14 36
With Air Cushion
(mm)
Bore size
NA
NB
WA
WB
20
31.5
17.5
27
13
8.5
25
31.5
17.5
27
13
10.5
32
31.5
17.5
27
13
11.5
40
37.5
21.5
32
16
15
192
12
29
ND
0
15 26 0.033
0
M14 x 1.5 42.5 37.5 21.5 32 0.039
ZZ
76
103
76
107
78
109
P
1
1
1
1
104 138
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod Type

Series
CM2RK
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
CJ1
CJP

CJ2
Made to Order
CM2
CM2RK A 20 100
CG1
With auto switch
CDM2RK A 20 100 M9BW

Mounting style
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
A
B Front mounting style
Bore size
20
25
32
40

auto switch.
(Example) CDM2RKB32-100
MB1
Number of
auto switches
MB
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
CA2
1 pc.
CS1
CS2
Auto switch
20 mm
Nil
Without auto switch
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Reed switch
Grommet
No Yes No Yes No
Yes

Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
AC
DC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
2-wire
12V
4-wire (NPN)
5V, 12V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
24V
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100V, 200V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
193
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series
CM2RK
Series CM2R direct mount

cylinder can be installed
directly through the use of a
square rod cover.
A type of cylinder in which the rod does

not rotate because of its hexagonal shape
Cylinder
20, 25
0.7
32, 40
0.5
Space-saving configuration
Because it is a directly mounted style

without using brackets, its overall length is
shorter, and its installation pitch can be
made smaller. Thus, the space that is
required for installation has been
dramatically reduced.
Improved installation
accuracy and strength
A centering boss has been provided to

improve the installation accuracy. Also,
because it is the directly mounted style,
the strength has been increased.
Two styles of installation
Two styles of installations are available

and can be selected according to the
purpose: the front mounting style or the
bottom mounting style.
Specifications
20
Bore size (mm)
25
32
40

Action
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa

Lubrication

+1.4
0 mm

Piston speed
50 to 500 mm/s
Cushion
Rubber bumper
0.27 J
0.4 J
0.65 J
1.2 J
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm)
20
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
25
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
32
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300

Note 2) The maximum limit is 1000 stroke, but the products that exceed the standard stroke might
not be able to fulfill the specifications.
Tightening Torque: Tighten the cylinder mounting bolts for the bottom mounting
Style (Series CM2RA) with the following tightening torque.
JIS Symbol
Double acting
Bore size (mm)
Hexagon socket head cap bolt size
Tightening torque(N m)
20
M5 x 0.8
2.4 to 3.6
25
M6
4.2 to 6.2
32
M8
10.0 to 15.0
40
M10
19.6 to 29.4
Refer to pages 214 to 218 for cylinders with an auto switch.

Operating range

Symbol
Specifications

XB6
XC3
XC6
XC8
XC9

194

Series
CM2RK
20-CM2RK Mounting style Bore size
Precautions
Stroke

cathode ray tube.
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters

54 and 55 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for
Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Caution on Handling/Disassembly
CJ1
Warning
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Piston speed
50 to 500 mm/s
Mounting

If a cover is rotated when installing a cylinder or screwing a fitting
into the port, it is likely to damage the junction part with cover.
2. Do not operate with the cushion needle in a fully closed
condition.
Using it in the fully closed state will cause the cushion seal to be
damaged. When adjusting the cushion needle, use the Hexagon
3. Do not open the cushion needle wide excessively.
If the cushion needle were set to be completely wide (more than 3
turns from fully closed), it would be equivalent to the cylinder with
no cushion, thus making the impacts extremely high. Do not use it
in such a way. Besides, using with fully open could give damage to
the piston or cover.
4. In the case of exceeding the standard stroke length,
implement an intermediate support.
When using cylinder with longer stroke, implement an intermediate
support for preventing the joint of rod cover and cylinder tube from
being broken by vibration or external load.
Caution
Accessory
Accessory Standard equipment
Mounting
Rod end nut
Option
Single knuckle joint Double knuckle joint (With pin)

Knuckle pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size 40) are shipped
together.
Mass
(kg)
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
0.14
0.23
0.32
0.63
0.14
0.22
0.32
0.62
0.04
0.07
0.09
0.14
Basic
mass
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that rotational

torque would be applied to the piston rod.
If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide will become
deformed, thus affecting the non-rotating accuracy.
Refer to the table below for the approximate values of the
allowable range of rotational torque.
Allowable rotational torque
(Nm or less)
20
25
32
40
0.2
0.25
0.25
0.44
To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded portion at the tip of

the piston rod, make sure to retract the piston rod entirely, and
place a wrench over the flat portion of the rod that protrudes.
Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the tightening torque
from being applied to the non-rotating guide.
Calculation: (Example) CM2RKA32-100 (32, 100 stroke, Bottom mounting)

Basic mass0.32 kg
Additional mass0.09 kg
Cylinder stroke100 mm
0.32 + 0.09 x 100/50 = 0.50 kg
2. When replacing rod seals, please contact SMC.

Air leakage may be happened, depending on the position in which
a rod seal is fitted. Thus, please contact SMC when replacing
them.
Cover and cylinder tube are connected to each other by caulking
method, thus making it impossible to disassemble. Therefore,
internal parts of a cylinder other than rod seal are not replaceable.
Use caution when handling a cylinder, which is running at a high
speed and a high frequency, because the surface of a cylinder
tube could get so hot enough as to cause you get burned.
195
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series
CM2RK
Construction
Rod section
Component Parts
No.
Description
Material
Note
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Head cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Piston rod
Stainless steel
Non-rotating guide
Seal retainer
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Phosphate coated
Urethane
Bumper A
10
Bumper B
11
Retaining ring
12
Piston seal
13
Piston gasket
NBR
14
Wear ring
Resin
15
Rod end nut
196
Chromated
Urethane
Stainless steel
NBR
Carbon steel
Nickel plated

16
Rod seal
NBR
Part no.
20
25
32
40
PDR-8W
PDR-10W
PDR-12W
PDR-14W

Series
CM2RK
Bottom Mounting Style

CM2RKA Bore size
Stroke
X
GB
H1
LH
ND
MM
CJ1
CJP
Width across
flats KB
LX
L
2 x RcP
GA
Y
2 x LD
AL
A
H
NB
NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
(mm)
Bore size
Stroke range
20
1 to 150
25
1 to 200
32
1 to 200
40
1 to 300
CM2
CG1
MB
(mm)
A
AL
GA GB
H1
20
18 15.5 30.3 13
22
27
28
25
22 19.5 36.3 17
22
31
33.5 10.2 39
32
22 19.5 42.3 17
22
31
37.5 12.2 47
40
24
21 52.3 22
27
11
34
46.5 14.2 58.5
Bore size
B1
KB
8.2 33.5
LD
LH LX
5.5, 9.5 counterbore

depth 6.5
6.6, 11 counterbore
depth 7.5
9, 14 counterbore
depth 10
11, 17.5 counterbore
depth 12.5
MM
NA NB
15
21
M8 x 1.25
24
29
15 20 00.033
ND
18
25
M10 x 1.25
30
29
15 26 00.033
21
30
M10 x 1.25 34.5 29
0
15 26 0.033
26
38
M14 x 1.5 42.5 37.5 21.5 32 0.039
76
39
12 103
ZZ
76
43
12 107
78
43
12 109
104
49
15 138
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
Front Mounting Style

CM2RKB Bore size
Stroke
Width across
flats KB
Width across
flats B1
4 x FF
F
FX
ND
MM
GB
2 x RcP
GA
H1
FX
F
AL
A
H
NB
NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
Stroke range
20
1 to 150
25
1 to 200
32
1 to 200
40
1 to 300
(mm)
Bore size
AL
B1
FF
FX
GA
GB
H1
KB
MM
NA
NB
ND
20
18
15.5
13
30.4
M5 x 0.8 depth 9
22
22
27
28
8.2
M8 x 1.25
24
29
15
20 00.033
25
22
19.5
17
36.4
M6 x 1 depth 11
26
22
31
33.5 10.2 M10 x 1.25
30
29
15
26 00.033
32
22
19.5
17
42.4
M6 x 1 depth 11
30
22
31
37.5 12.2 M10 x 1.25
34.5
29
15
26 00.033
40
24
21
22
52.4 M8 x 1.25 depth 14
36
27
11
34
46.5 14.2 M14 x 1.5
42.5 37.5 21.5
32 00.039
ZZ
76
103
76
107
78
109
104 138
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
197
Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type

Series
CM2Q
20, 25, 32, 40
,,
Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y
to realize both-direction low friction and lowspeed operation.
How to Order
Mounting style
Basic style
B
Axial foot style
L
Single clevis style
C
Double clevis style
D

FZ
Boss-cut rod side

flange style
UZ
Boss-cut rod side

trunnion style
Direction of low friction

F
B
With pressure at head side

With pressure at rod side
Made to Order
CM2Q L 40 150 F
With auto switch
CDM2Q L 40 150 F M9BW
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)

(Example) CDM2QF32-100B
198
Auto switch
Bore size
20
25
32
40
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
Nil
Without auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
Number of
auto switches
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
1 pc.
Air Cylinder: Centralized Piping Type

Series
CM2
P
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
CJ1
CJP
Mounting style
B
F
U
CJ2
Rod boot
Basic style
Nil
None
J
K
CM2
Nylon tarpaulin
CG1
Made to Order
With auto switch
CM2 F 32
P 150
CDM2 F 32
P 150
MB
MB1
CA2
M9BW
CS1
Number of
auto switches
Centralized piping type
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)

(Example) CDM2B40P-100
20
25
32
40
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
Port thread type
Bore size
Nil
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
Nil
Rc
TN
TF
NPT
CS2
1 pc.
Auto switch
Without auto switch

Nil
For the applicable auto switch model, refer to
the table below.
40 mm
Special function
Electrical
entry
Grommet
Connector
Yes
Solid state switch
Type
Indicator
light
Grommet
Yes
Connector
Yes No Yes No Yes No
Reed switch
Grommet
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
5V, 12V
12V
4-wire (NPN)
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication)
DC
2-wire
Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
5V, 12V
5V
24V
12V
A96
100V
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
B59W
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
100V or less
2-wire
Auto switch
model
Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
Relay,
IC circuit PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
D-
199
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series
CM2 P
Specifications
A cylinder in which two

piping ports are provided in
the head cover, enabling
pipes to be connected only in
the axial direction.
20
Bore size (mm)
25
Action
32
40
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa

Lubrication
+1.4
0
mm
Rubber bumper
Cushion
Piston speed
50 to 700
mm/s
50 to 650
mm/s
50 to 590
mm/s
50 to 420
mm/s
0.27 J
0.4 J
0.65 J
1.2 J
Standard Stroke
(2)
Standard stroke (1)

(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
JIS Symbol
Double acting,
Single rod
Maximum manufacturable stroke

(mm)
20
25
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
32
200, 250, 300
1000
40

Symbol
Accessory Standard equipment
Specifications
Mounting
XA
Change of rod end shape
XC4
Basic style
XC6
Rod side
Flange side style
(1)
Rod side
trunnion style
(1)

Option
Mounting Rod end Single knuckle Double knuckle

Rod boot
nut
joint
joint (With pin)
nut
(1 pc.)
Pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size 40) are shipped together with double knuckle
joint.
Precautions
Precautions.

Mounting bracket
Flange
Trunnion (With nuts)
Bore size (mm)
Min.
order
20
CM-F020B
CM-F032B
CM-F040B
1 flange
CM-T020B
CM-T032B
CM-T040B
1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut
25
32
40

Operating range
200

Rod boot material
Nylon tarpaulin
20-CM2 Mounting style Bore size P
Mass
(kg)
Bore size (mm)
25
32
40
Basic style
0.14
0.21
0.27
0.58
0.20
0.30
0.36
0.70
0.18
0.28
0.33
0.68
0.05
0.08
0.10
0.17
Option
bracket
20
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.23
Double knuckle (with pin)
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.20
Calculation: (Example) CM2F32P-100

Basic mass0.36
Additional mass0.10
0.36 + 0.10 x 100/50 = 0.56 kg
Stroke
Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot itself.
Basic
mass
CM2 P
Rod Boot Material

Symbol
Series

cathode ray tube.
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Specifications
CG1
Action
1.0 MPa
0.05 MPa
Piston speed
MB
20, 25, 32, 40
Bore size (mm)
20
50 to 700 mm/s
25
50 to 650 mm/s
32
50 to 590 mm/s
40
50 to 420 mm/s
Mounting
MB1
CA2
CS1
Basic style, Rod side flange style,

CS2
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
201
Series
CM2 P
Construction
Component Parts
Description
Material
Note
No.
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
13
Description
Retaining ring
Head cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
14
Piston seal
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
15
Piston gasket
NBR
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
16
Gasket
Resin
Piston rod
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
Bushing
Seal retainer
Retaining ring
Carbon steel
Pipe
Aluminum alloy
10
Stud
Brass
11
Bumper A
Urethane
12
Bumper B
Urethane
No.
Material
Note
Stainless steel
NBR
17
Pipe gasket
18
Spacer gasket
Resin
Stainless steel
19
Wear ring
Resin
Phosphate coated
20
mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Clear anodized
21
Rod end nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
Urethane rubber
Except 25

No.
Description
Part no.
Material
32
40
20
25
22
Rod seal
NBR
PDU-8Z PDU-10Z PDU-12LZ PDU-14Z
Basic Style (B)

Bore size P
20
Stroke
20
25
(Head side pressure port)
H1
(Rod side pressure port)
32 to 40
H2
NA
G G
Width across
flats B1
Width across
flats KA
NN
AL
A
MM
K
H
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(Rod side pressure port) QY
NA
(mm)
Bore size
AL
H1
H2
KA
MM
NA
NN
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
12 26 00.033 13 10.5 9 45
14 32 00.039 16 13.5 10.5 50
37.5 5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
10 46.5
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5 42.5
B2
20
18 15.5 13
26
25
22 19.5 17
32
0
20 0.033 13 10.5
10 26 00.033 13 10.5
32
22 19.5 17
32
40
24
41
21
22
FL
B1
M32 x 2
QY
ZZ
19.8 14
62 103
14
62 107
25.8 16
64 109
29.8 16
88 138
22
The dimensions of air cylinders with a rod boot are the same as the standard,
double acting/single rod boss-cut style. Refer to page 135.
202

Series
CM2 P

CM2F Bore size P
20
20
Stroke
25
Z
NN
20 to 32
C2
F Width across
H2 flats B2
H1
CJ1
P
MM
2 x FD
FX
FZ
AL
A
Mounting hole
40
K FT
H
CJP
CJ2
NA
G G
FB
CM2
QY
NA
N
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
P
CG1
MB
32 to 40
FY
MB1
CA2
4 x FD
Mounting hole
Bore size
A AL B1 B2 C2
F FB FD FT FX FY FZ G
20
18 15.5 13 26 30
13 34
60 75 41
M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
25
22 19.5 17 32 37 10 13 40
60 75 45
8 33.5 5.5 8
M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
32
22 19.5 17 32 37 12 13 40
60 75
8 37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
40
24 21 22 41 47.3 14 16 52
66 36 82 10.5 50
H1 H2
45
I
28
K KA
5
MM
N NA
NN
(mm)
Z ZZ
Q QY S
CS1
19.8 14 62 37 103
8
8
22 14 62 41 107
25.8 16 64 41 109
CS2
8 10 46.5 7 12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2 1 4 29.8 16 88 45 138


CM2U Bore size P
Stroke
20
20
25
Width across flats B1 Width across

flats B2 NN
32 to 40
P
H1
G G
NA
TY
TD
TX
TZ
MM
AL
A
TT
K
Z
H
QY
NA
(Rod side
pressure port)
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
A
AL
B1
B2
20
18 15.5 13
26
25
22 19.5 17
32
22 19.5 17
Bore size
40
24
21
22
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
32
10
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
32
12
45
37.5 5.5 10
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
41
14 10.5 50
46.5
12
QY
TD TT TX TY TZ
19.8 14
62
10
32
32
52
36 103
22
14
62
10
40
40
60
40 107
25.8 16
64
10
40
40
60
40 109
D-
ZZ
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2

29.8 16 88 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 138
4
203
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Air Cylinder: With End Lock
Series
CBM2
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
CBM2 L 40 150
With auto switch
H N
H N M9BW
CDBM2 L 40 150
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
Manual release type
Mounting style
B
L
F
G
C
D
U
T
Basic style
Axial foot style
Single clevis style
N
L
Bore size
20
25
32
40
Lock type
20 mm
25 mm
Lock position
32 mm
H
R
W
40 mm
Double clevis style

Non-lock type
Rod end lock

Double end lock
Rod boot
Cushion

(Example) CDBM2L40-100-HN
Nil
Rubber bumper
Air cushion
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
1 pc.
Head end lock

Number of
auto switches
Nil
None
J
K
Nylon tarpaulin
Auto switch
Without auto switch
Nil
For the applicable auto switch
model, refer to the table
below.
Made to Order
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Reed switch
Grommet
No Yes No Yes No
Yes

Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
AC
DC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5V, 12V
2-wire
12V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24V
5V, 12V
12V
5V,12V
2-wire
12V
4-wire (NPN)
5V, 12V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
24V
5V
12V
100V
100V or less
100V, 200V
200V or less
24V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100V, 200V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
204
Series CBM2
Specifications
Holds the cylinders home

position even if the air supply
is cut off.
When air is discharged at the stroke end
position, the lock engages to maintain the
rod in that position.
Non-lock type and lock type

are standardized for manual
release.
Auto switch is mountable.
20
Bore size (mm)

Type
Action
Fluid
Proof pressure
25
32
40
Pneumatic
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.15 MPa

Cushion
Lubrication
Piston speed
Mounting

+1.4
0 mm
Rubber bumper
50 to 750 mm/s
50 to 1000 mm/s
Air cushion
Head side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis style,
Rod side trunnion style, Head side trunnion style
0.05 MPa for other part than the lock unit
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
Lock Specifications
MB
Lock position
Head end, Rod end, Double end

20
25
32
40
215
330
550
860
1 mm or less
Non-lock type, Lock type
Holding force (Max.) (N)

Backlash
Manual release
MB1
CA2
CS1
Allowable Kinetic Energy

Rubber
bumper
Air
cushion

Symbol
CS2
20
25
32
40
0.27
0.4
0.65
1.2
Effective cushion length (mm)
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.8
Cushion sectional area (cm2)
2.09
3.30
5.86
9.08
Kinetic energy
absorbable (J)
0.54
0.78
1.27
2.35
Bore size (mm)
Specifications
Standard Stroke

XB6
XB9

XC4 With heavy duty scraper
XC3
XC5
XC6
XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type

Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
Standard stroke
(mm)
Long stroke
(mm)
Maximum manufacturable
stroke (mm)
400
450
1000
450
500
Long stroke applies to the axial foot style and the rod side flange style only.
When using other types of mounting brackets or exceeding the long stroke limit, the
maximum allowable stroke will be determined by the stroke selection table listed on front
matter 28.
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
25, 50, 75, 100,
125, 150, 200, 250
300

Available only for locking at head end

Operating range
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
205
Series CBM2
Accessory/For details, refer to pages 144 and 145, since it is the same as Series CM2 standard type.
Standard
equipment
Mounting nut, Rod end nut, Clevis pin, Lock release bolt (N type only)
Option
Single knuckle joint, Double knuckle joint (With pin)
Mass
Basic
mass
(kg)
20
25
32
40
Basic style
0.14
0.21
0.28
0.56
Axial foot style
0.29
0.37
0.44
0.83
Flange style
0.20
0.30
0.37
0.68
Single clevis
0.18
0.25
0.32
0.65
Double clevis style
0.19
0.27
0.33
0.69
Trunnion style
0.18
0.28
0.34
0.66
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.13
0.07
0.07
0.14
0.14
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.23
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.20

Accessory
Lock Unit Additional Mass
(kg)
20
25
32
40
Head end lock (H)
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.04
Rod end lock (R)
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.02
Double end lock (W)
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
Head end lock (H)
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
Rod end lock (R)
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.04
Double end lock (W)
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.10
Bore size (mm)

Manual release
non-lock type (N)
Manual release
lock type (L)
Calculation: (Example) CBM2L32-100-HN

Basic mass 0.44 (Foot style, 32)
Additional mass 0.08/50 stroke
Locking mass 0.02 (Locking at head end, Manual release non-locking type)
0.44 + 0.08 x 100/50 + 0.02 = 0.62 kg

Mounting bracket
Min.
order
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Axial foot
CM-L020B
CM-L032B
CM-L040B
2 foot, 1 mounting nut
Flange
CM-F020B
CM-F032B
CM-F040B
1 flange
Single clevis
CM-C020B
CM-C032B
CM-C040B
1 single clevis, 3 liners
Double clevis (With pin)
CM-D020B
CM-D032B
CM-D040B
Trunnion (With nut)
CM-T020B
CM-T032B
CM-T040B

1 clevis pin, 2 retaining rings
1 trunnion, 1 trunnion nut

206
Symbol
Rod boot material
Nylon tarpaulin
Mounting nuts are not equipped to single clevis and double clevis.
Bore size (mm)
Rod Boot Material
Series CBM2
Double Rod Type End Lock Cylinder

CBM2W Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
H Manual release type
Double rod type end lock cylinder
Specifications
Dimensions
Action
Bore size (mm)

20
25
32
40
1.0 MPa
0.15 MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Piston speed
50 to 750 mm/s
Mounting
Bore size
(mm)
20, 25, 32, 40
Basic style, Foot style, Flange style, Trunnion style
Lock position
Head end lock
ZZ
41
144
45
152
45
154
50
188
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
Dimensions for other bore sizes are the

same as the double acting single rod model.
CM2
500 mm
Note 1) Auto switch can be mounted.

Note 2) Refer to the Precautions on page 210 when mounting flanges and trunnion brackets on the end lock side.
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
H + stroke
ZZ + 2 x stroke
Non-rotating Rod Type End Lock Cylinder

CBM2K Mounting style Bore size
Stroke
H Manual release type
Non-rotating rod type end lock cylinder
Dimensions
Specifications
Action
Bore size (mm)

20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
0.15 MPa
Cushion
Rubber bumper
Piston speed
50 to 500 mm/s
Mounting
Lock position
Basic, foot, rod side flange,

head side flange, single clevis,
double clevis, rod side trunnion,
head side trunnion
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
KA
8.2
10.2
12.2
14.2
Dimensions for other bore sizes are the

same as the double acting single rod model.
Head end lock

1000 mm
Note 1) Auto switch can be mounted.

Note 2) Refer to the Precautions on page 210 for the head side flange and head
side trunnion styles.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
207
Series CBM2
Construction
Head end lock
Manual release (Non-lock type): Suffix N
Rod end lock
Manual release (Lock type): Suffix L
With air cushion
Component Parts
Component Parts
No.
1
Material
Note
Rod cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Head cover
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Cylinder tube
Stainless steel
Piston
Aluminum alloy
Chromated
Piston rod
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated
Bushing
Seal retainer
Retaining ring
Lock piston
Lock bushing
9
10
Description

Carbon steel
Phosphate coated
Carbon steel
Hard chrome plated,

Heat treated
Copper alloy
Stainless steel
Lock spring
12
Bumper
Urethane
13
Hexagon socket
head cap screw
Alloy steel
Description
Note
Material
NBR
NBR
NBR
Rod seal
Lock piston seal
Cushion needle seal
Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

With lock in single end
Stainless steel
11
No.
26
27
33
14A
Cap A
Aluminum die-casted
Black painted
14B
Cap B
Carbon steel
Oxide film treated
15
Rubber cap
16
M/O knob
Zinc die-casted
Black painted
17
M/O bolt
Alloy steel
18
M/O spring
Steel wire
Zinc chromated
19
Stopper ring
Carbon steel
Zinc chromated
20
Bumper A
21
Bumper B
22
Retaining ring
23
Piston seal
24
Piston gasket
NBR
25
Wear ring
Resin
28
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
29
Rod end nut
Carbon steel
Nickel plated
30
Cushion ring
Aluminum alloy
Anodized
31
Cushion needle
Alloy steel
32
Cushion seal
Urethane
Synthetic rubber
Urethane
Urethane
Stainless steel
NBR
Bore size
(mm)
Kit no.
20
25
32
CBM2-20-PS CBM2-25-PS CBM2-32-PS CBM2-40-PS
With lock at double ends

Kit no.
CBM2-20-PS-W CBM2-25-PS-W CBM2-32-PS-W CBM2-40-PS-W
Seal kit includes @6 and @7. Order the seal kit, based on each bore size.
(Except #3.)
Seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g). Order with the following part
number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
How to Change Seal Kit

<Removal>
Remove the retaining ring (A) by using a tool for installing a type C
retaining ring for hole. Shut off the port on the rod cover by finger
and then pull out the piston rod, and the seal retainer (B) and the
rod seal (C) are removed.
Port
<Mounting>
After applying enough grease on
the rod seal, attach in this order,
rod seal (C), seal retainer (B) and
retaining ring (A).
(C) Rod seal

(B) Seal retainer
(A) Retaining ring
208
40
Series CBM2
Basic Style (Dimensions are common irrespective of the lock position; rod end, head end, or double end.)
Head end lock: CBM2B Bore size
Stroke -HN
DL
2 x NN
NA
2 x Eh8
NA
2 x RcP
HR
H2

CJ1
H1
NA
G
MM
Width across
flats KA
AL
A
K
H
NA

2 x FL
N
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
DL
MO
Stroke -RN
CG1
MB
HN
Rod end lock: CBM2B Bore size
CJP
20
MB1
CA2
CS1
Double end lock: CBM2B Bore size
Manual release (Lock type): Suffix L
Stroke -WN
CS2
With rod boot
l
JH
Width across
flats B3
f
h
JW
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Symbol
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
H1
H2
HN
HR
(Max.)
8 7.5 20
13 10.5 8
0
Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 10 7.5 26 0.033 13 10.5 8
0
Up to 300 22 19.5 17 32 12 7.5 26 0.033 13 10.5 8
0
Up to 300 24 21 22 41 14 10.7 32 0.039 16 13.5 11
41
22.3 34 28
45
25.3 37 33.5 5.5
45
50
10 33.6 47.8 46.5
Stroke
range
AL B1
B2
DL
FL
0
0.033
Up to 300 18 15.5 13 26
MM
MO N NA
NN
M8 x 1.25
15 15 24
M20 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25
15 15 30
M26 x 1.5
18
18
62 116
27.6 39.3 37.5 5.5 10
M10 x 1.25
15 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 122
M14 x 1.5
19 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
18
14
K KA
5
12
With Rod Boot

B3
30 36 18
68
81
93
106
131
156
181
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
32 36 18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
32 36 18
72
85
97
110
135
160
185
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
41 46 20
77
90
102
115
140
165
190
12.5
25
37.5
50
75
100
125
(mm)
ZZ
Symbol
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
(mm)
20
25
32
40
88 154
With Rod Boot

Bore size
62 120
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
(mm)
20
25
32
40
ZZ
(mm)
h
Symbol
Bore size
JH
JW
143
156
168
181
206
231
256
23.5
10.5
147
160
172
185
210
235
260
23.5
10.5
149
162
174
187
212
237
262
23.5
10.5
181
194
206
219
244
269
294
27
10.5
D-
-X
Individual
-X
For details about the rod end nut and accessory, refer to pages 144 and 145.
Technical
data
209
Series CBM2
With Mounting Bracket (For dimensions not indicated below, refer to page 209.)
-H N
-R L
-W
2 x LC
LT
4 x LD
Y X
Rod side flange style: CBM2F Bore size
LX
LZ
-H N
-R L
-W
Stroke
Head side flange style:

CBM2G Bore size Stroke
4 x FD
Mounting hole
-H N
-R L
-W
FY
2 x FD
Mounting hole
C2
X Y
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Stroke
LH
Axial foot style: CBM2L Bore size
FX
FZ
FT
Z + Stroke
FT
40
20 to 32
Single clevis style: CBM2C Bore size
Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Double clevis style: CBM2D Bore size
-H N
-R L
-W
Stroke
20
RR
CX
-H N
-R L
-W
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CD
CD hole H10
Axis d9
Clevis pin and retaining ring

(cotter pin for bore size 40) are
shipped together.
U
CX
RR
20
CZ
Head side trunnion style:

CBM2T Bore size Stroke
-H N
-R L
-W
-H N
-R L
-W
TD
TY
Rod side trunnion style: CBM2U Bore size Stroke
TT
TT
TX
TZ
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Axial foot style
Bore
size
Stroke
(mm) range B LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ X Y
20
25
32
40
Flange style
Z ZZ
Stroke range
Rod side Head side
B C2 FD FT FX FY FZ
Clevis style
Z
Rod side Head side
Trunnion style
Z
ZZ
Stroke
Stroke
range CD CX CZ L RR U Z ZZ range TD TT TX TY TZ
Rod side Head side Rod side Head side
to 400 40 4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 20 8 21 131 Up to 400 Up to 300 34 30 7
4 60 75
37
107 Up to 300 9 10 19 30 9 14 133 142 Up to 300 8 10 32 32 52 36
108 116 118
to 450 47 4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 20 8 25 135 Up to 450 Up to 300 40 37 7
4 60 75
41
111 Up to 300 9 10 19 30 9 14 137 146 Up to 300 9 10 40 40 60 40
112 120 122
to 450 47 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 20 8 25 137 Up to 450 Up to 300 40 37 7
4 60 75
41
113 Up to 300 9 10 19 30 9 14 139 148 Up to 300 9 10 40 40 60 40
114 122 124
7 30 134 3.2 55 75 23 10 27 171 Up to 500 Up to 300 52 47.3 7 5 66 36 82
45
143 Up to 300 10 15 30 39 11 18 177 188 Up to 300 10 11 53 53 77 44.5 143.5 154 154
to 500 54 4
Dimensions other than mentioned above are the same as on page 209.
Precautions on Trunnion Style, Flange Style

1. Trunnion style
a With lock in rod side of the rod side trunnion style s With lock in head side of
the head side trunnion style d With lock in both sides. For above cases, use
caution since the trunnion pin and fittings may be interfered with each other
because the trunnion pin and port are very closed to each other.
210
2. Flange style (20 to 32)

a With lock in rod side of the rod side flange style s With lock in head side of the
head side flange style d With lock in both sides. For above cases, use caution
since the bolt for mounting a cylinder and fittings may be interfered with each other.
Refer to Special Port Position in Made to Order Specifications on page 1416.
Series CBM2
With Air Cushion (For dimensions not indicated below, refer to pages 209 and 210.)
Basic style
Head end lock: CBM2B Bore size
Stroke A-HN
WA2
Cushion needle
45
WA1
CJ1
20
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJP
With Air Cushion
(mm)
S
WA1
WA2
ZZ
Bore size
(mm)
Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock
20
72
73
83
13
24
24
23
13
23
126
127
137
25
72
73
83
13
24
24
23
13
23
130
131
141
32
72
75
83
13
24
24
21
13
21
130
133
141
40
101
93
96
16
24
24
21
16
21
159
162
167
-H N
Axial foot style: CBM2L Bore size
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
Stroke A -R L
-W
MB1
CA2
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CS1
Rod side flange style: CBM2F Bore size
Stroke
-H N
A -R L
-W
Head side flange style:

-H N
CBM2G Bore size Stroke A -R L
CS2
-W
Z + Stroke
Single clevis style: CBM2C Bore size
Stroke
-H N
A -R L
-W
Double clevis style: CBM2D Bore size
-H N
Stroke A -R L
-W
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Rod side trunnion style:

-H N
CBM2U Bore size Stroke A -R L
Head side trunnion style:

-H N
CBM2T Bore size Stroke A -R L
-W
-W
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
Axial foot style

LS

Z
ZZ
Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock
112
112
112
139
113
113
115
142
123
123
123
147
141
145
145
176
142
146
148
179
152
156
156
184
117
121
121
148
118
122
124
151
128
132
132
156
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
Clevis style
Z
D-

Z
ZZ
-X
ZZ
Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock Head end lock Rod end lock Double end lock
143
147
147
182
144
148
150
185
154
158
158
190
152
156
156
193
153
157
159
196
163
167
167
201
118
122
122
148.5
119
123
125
151.5
129
133
133
156.5
128
132
132
159
129
133
135
162
139
143
143
167
211
Individual
-X
Technical
data
Series CBM2
Specific Product Precautions 1

Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Operating Pressure
Use the Recommended Pneumatic Circuit
Caution
Caution
This is necessary for proper operation and release

of the lock.
1. Use pressures over 0.15 MPa at port with locking mechanism.
Exhaust Speed
Caution
1. Locking will occur automatically if the pressure applied to the
port on the lock mechanism side falls to 0.05 MPa or less. In
cases where the piping on the lock mechanism side is long
and thin, or the speed controller is separated at some distance
from the cylinder port, the exhaust speed will be reduced. Take
note that some time may be required for the lock to engage. In
addition, clogging of a silencer mounted on the solenoid valve
exhaust port can produce the same effect.
Relation to Cushion
Head end lock
Caution
Rod end lock
1. When cushion valve at side with locking mechanism is fully

opened or closed, piston rod may reached at stroke end. Thus
lock is not established. And when locking is done at cushion
valve fully closed, adjust cushion valve since lock may not be
released.
Caution
1. Do not use 3 position solenoid valves.
Avoid use in combination with 3 position solenoid valves
(especially closed center metal seal types). If pressure is
trapped in the port on the lock mechanism side, the cylinder
cannot be locked. Furthermore, even after being locked, the
lock may be released after some time, due to air leaking from
the solenoid valve and entering the cylinder.
2. Back pressure is required to release end lock.

Be sure air is supplied to side of cylinder without the
locking mechanism, as above, prior to supplying air
pressure to the side with end lock or lock may not be
released. (Refer to Releasing the Lock.)
3. Release the lock when mounting or adjusting the

cylinder.
If mounting or other work is performed when the cylinder is
locked, the lock unit may be damaged.
4. Operate with a load ratio of 50% or less.

If the load ratio exceeds 50%, this may cause problems such
as failure of the lock to release, or damage to the lock unit.
5. Do
not
operate
synchronization.
multiple
cylinders
in
Avoid applications in which two or more end lock cylinders are

synchronized to move one workpiece, as one of the cylinder
locks may not be able to release when required.
6. Use a speed controller with meter-out control.

Lock cannot be released occasionally by meter-in control.
7. Be sure to operate completely to the cylinder stroke

end on the side with the lock.
If the cylinder piston does not reach the end of the stroke,
locking might not work or locking might not be released.
212
Releasing the Lock
Warning
1. Before releasing the lock, be sure to supply air to the side
without the lock mechanism, so that there is no load applied to
the lock mechanism when it is released. (Refer to the
recommended pneumatic circuits.) If the lock is released when
the port on the other side is in an exhaust state, and with a
load applied to the lock unit, the lock unit may be subjected to
an excessive force and be damaged. Furthermore, sudden
movement of the piston rod is very dangerous.
Series CBM2

Be sure to read before handling. Refer to front matters 54 and 55 for Safety Instructions
and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Working Principle
Manual Release
Caution
The figures below are for Series CBA2.
1. Manual release (Non-lock type)

Insert the accessory bolt from the top of the rubber cap (it is
not necessary to remove the rubber cap), and after screwing it
into the lock piston, pull it to release the lock. If you stop
pulling the bolt, the lock will return to an operational state.
Thread sizes, pulling forces and strokes are as shown below.
Bore size (mm)
Thread size
Pulling force
Stroke (mm)
20, 25, 32
40
M2.5 x 0.45 x 25l or more
4.9 N
M3 x 0.5 x 30l or more
10 N
Head end lock (Rod end lock is the same, too.)

1. When the piston rod is getting closer to the stroke end, the
taper part () of the piston rod edge will push the lock piston
up.
Spring
Lock piston
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
Pressure
CG1
Remove the bolt for normal operation.

It can cause lock malfunction or faulty release.
Piston rod
Rubber cap
MB
MB1
2. Lock piston is pushed up further.
CA2
CS1
CS2
2. Manual release (Lock type)

While pushing the M/O knob, turn it 90 counterclockwise. The
lock is released (and remains in a released state) by aligning
the mark on the cap with the OFF mark on the M/O knob.
When locking is desired, turn M/O button clockwise 90 while
pushing fully, correspond on cap and ON mark on M/O
button. The correct position is confirmed by a click sound
click.
If not confirmed, locking is not done.
Unlock
3. Lock piston is pushed up into the groove of piston rod to

lock it. (Lock piston is pushed up by spring force.) At this
time, it is exhausted from port in head side and introduced
to atmosphere.
Lock
Locked
4. When pressure is supplied in the head side, lock piston will

be pushed up to release the lock.
Back pressure
Locked
Released
Exhaust
Pressure
Released
5. Lock will be released, then cylinder will move forward.
D-
-X
Exhaust
Individual
-X
Technical
data
213
Series CM2
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
Reed auto switch
Solid state auto switch
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9 W
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
16.5
16.5
Auto switch
22
(24.5)
22
( ): Dimensions of D-A93 type
D-C7/C8
D-H7 /H7 W/H7NF/H7BAL
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
D-B5/B6/B59W
D-G5NTL
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
D-G39A/K39A
D-A33A/A34A
G 1/2 (Applicable cable O.D.
6.8 to 9.6)
Hs
Auto switch

6.8 to 9.6)
Hs
Auto switch
D-A44A
D-H7C
Auto switch
Hs
G 1/2 (Applicable cable

O.D. 6.8 to 11.5)
D-C73C/C80C
Auto switch
Hs
Auto switch
Hs
214
Auto switch
Air Cylinder
Series CM2
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Excluding Single Acting Type)
Auto switch
model
D-M9
D-M9W
D-A9
D-C7
D-C80
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
(mm)
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-G5NTL
CJ1
20
6.5
(4)
5.5
(3)
10.5
(8)
9.5
(7)
1
()
0
()
7
(5)
6
(4)
4
(2)
3
(1)
0.5
()
0
()
6
(4)
5
(3)
2.5
(0.5)
1.5
(0)
CJP
25
6.5
(4)
5.5
(3)
10.5
(8)
9.5
(7)
1
()
0
()
7
(5)
6
(4)
4
(2)
3
(1)
0.5
()
0
()
6
(4)
5
(3)
2.5
(0.5)
1.5
(0)
CJ2
32
7.5
(5)
6.5
(4)
11.5
(9)
10.5
(8)
2
(0)
1
(0)
8
(6)
7
(5)
5
(3)
4
(2)
1.5
(0)
0.5
(0)
7
(5)
6
(4)
3.5
(1.5)
2.5
(0.5)
CM2
40
13.5
11.5
17.5
15.5
13
12
10
6.5
5.5
12
11
8.5
7.5
Bore size
( ): Setting position for the auto switch with an air cushion.

D-B5/B6/A3A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be mounted on the bore size 20 and 25 cylinder with an air cushion.
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
Auto Switch Mounting Height

Auto switch
model
Bore size
20
25
32
40
MB
(mm)
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
D-H7C
D-C7
D-C80
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
22
25.5
22.5
25
60
69.5
24.5
28
25
27.5
62.5
72
28
31.5
28.5
31
66
75.5
32
35.5
32.5
35
70
79.5
CG1
MB1
CA2
CS1
CS2
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Technical
data
215
Series CM2
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and
Mounting Height: Single Acting/Spring Return Type (S), Spring Extend Type (T)
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position: Standard Type/Spring Return Type (S),
Non-rotating Rod Type/Spring Return Type (S)
A Dimensions
Auto switch model
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
D-B5
D-B64
D-C7
D-C80
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-B59W
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-G5NTL
Bore size
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
Up to 15st
31.5
31.5
32.5
38.5
35.5
35.5
36.5
42.5
26
26
27
32
32
32
33
38
29
29
30
35
25.5
25.5
26.5
31.5
31
31
32
37
27.5
27.5
28.5
33.5
51 to 100st
56.5
56.5
57.5
63.5
60.5
60.5
61.5
67.5
51
51
52
57
57
57
58
63
54
54
55
60
50.5
50.5
51.5
56.5
56
56
57
62
52.5
52.5
53.5
58.5
101 to 150st 151 to 200st 201 to 250st
81.5
81.5
107.5
82.5
138.5
113.5
88.5
85.5
85.5
111.5
86.5
142.5
117.5
92.5
76
76
102
77
132
107
82
82
82
108
83
138
113
88
79
79
105
80
135
110
85
75.5
75.5
101.5
76.5
131.5
106.5
81.5
81
81
107
82
137
112
87
77.5
77.5
103.5
78.5
133.5
108.5
83.5
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position: Standard Type/Spring Extend Type (T),
Non-rotating Rod Type/Spring Extend Type (T)
Auto switch model
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
D-B5
D-B64
D-C7
D-C80
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-B59W
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-G5NTL
216
Bore size
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
6.5
6.5
7.5
13.5
10.5
10.5
11.5
17.5
1
1
2
7
7
7
8
13
4
4
5
10
0.5
0.5
1.5
6.5
6
6
7
12
2.5
2.5
3.5
8.5
(mm)
B
5.5
5.5
6.5
11.5
9.5
9.5
10.5
15.5
0
0
1
6
6
6
7
12
3
3
4
9
0
0
0.5
5.5
5
5
6
11
1.5
1.5
2.5
7.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming

the operating condition in the actual
setting.
(mm)
B Dimensions
Up to 15st
30.5
30.5
31.5
36.5
34.5
34.5
35.5
40.5
25
25
26
31
31
31
32
37
28
28
29
34
24.5
24.5
25.5
30.5
30
30
31
36
26.5
26.5
27.5
32.5
51 to 100st
55.5
55.5
56.5
61.5
59.5
59.5
60.5
65.5
50
50
51
56
56
56
57
62
53
53
54
59
49.5
49.5
50.5
55.5
55
55
56
61
51.5
51.5
52.5
57.5
101 to 150st 151 to 200st 201 to 250st
80.5
80.5
106.5
81.5
136.5
111.5
86.5
84.5
84.5
110.5
85.5
140.5
115.5
90.5
75
75
101
76
131
106
81
81
81
107
82
137
112
87
78
78
104
79
134
109
84
74.5
74.5
100.5
75.5
130.5
105.5
80.5
80
80
106
81
136
111
86
76.5
76.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming
102.5
77.5
the operating condition in the actual
setting.
132.5
107.5
81.5
Air Cylinder
Series CM2
Minimum Auto Switch Mounting Stroke

n: No. of auto switch (mm)
Auto switch model
Different surfaces
No. of auto switch mounted

2
Same surface
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
10
15 (1)
45
D-C7
D-C80
10
15
50
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
10
15
60
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-H7C
10
15
65
D-B5/B64
D-G5NTL
10
15
75
D-B59W
15
20
75
D-A3A(2)
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
10
35
(1)
100
n
Different surfaces
Same surface
(n 2)
15 + 45
2
(n=2, 4, 6)
45 + 45(n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n=2, 4, 6)
50 + 45(n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n=2, 4, 6)
60 + 45(n 2)
(n 2)
15 + 50
2
(n=2, 4, 6)
65 + 50(n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n=2, 4, 6)
75 + 55(n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n=2, 4, 6)
75 + 55(n 2)
15 + 45
15 + 45
15 + 50
20 + 50
35 + 30(n 2)
CJ1
CJP
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
100 + 100(n 2)
CS1
Note 1) Auto switch mounting (The adjustment as shown in the figures below is required with the following stroke ranges.)
With 2 auto switches

Different surfaces (1)
CA2
CS2
Same surface (1)
A
A-6
15
Auto switch model
Auto switch
D-M9
D-M9W
B-6
The proper auto switch mounting position is 6 mm inward from the

switch holder edge.
The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a direction

(cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the auto switch and
lead wire do not interfere with each other.
45 to less than 50 stroke
D-A93
D-M9
D-M9W
Note 2) D-A3A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be mounted on the centralized piping type Series CDM2P.
Operating Range
(mm)
Auto switch model
Bore size
20
25
32
40
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
3.5
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B64
D-A3A/A44ANote)
12
12
13
13
D-B59W
D-H7/H7W/H7BAL
D-G5NTL/H7NF
D-H7C
D-G39A/K39ANote)
D-
4.5
8.5
10
Since this is a guideline including hysteresis,

not meant to be guaranteed. (Assuming
approximately 30% dispersion.) There may
be the case it will vary substantially depending
on an ambient environment.
-X
Individual
-X
Note) D-A3A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be

mounted on the centralized piping type
Series CDM2P.
Technical
data
217
Series CM2
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9 W
D-C7 /C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7
D-H7 W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-B5 /B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
D-G5NBL
D-A3 A/A44ANote 2)
D-G39A/K39A
20
25
32
40
Note 1)
qBM2-020
wBJ3-1
Note 1)
qBM2-025
wBJ3-1
Note 1)
qBM2-032
wBJ3-1
Note 1)
qBM2-040
wBJ3-1
BM2-020
BM2-025
BM2-032
BM2-040
BA2-020
BA2-025
BA2-032
BA2-040
BM3-020
BM3-025
BM3-032
BM3-040
Note 1) Two kinds of auto switch brackets are used as a set.

Note 2) D-A3A/A44A/G39A/K39A cannot be mounted on the centralized piping type Series CDM2P.
[Mounting screw set made of stainless steel]

The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel (including nuts) is available. Use it in
accordance with the operating environment. (Please order the auto switch mounting bracket separately,
since it is not included.)
BBA4: For D-C7/C8/H7 types
Note 3) Refer to page 1358 for the details of BBA4 screws.
The above stainless steel screws are used when a cylinder is shipped with D-H7BAL type auto
switches. When only an auto switch is shipped independently, BBA4 screws are attached.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
Auto switch
c
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
b
Auto switch mounting screw
Set screw
1. BJ2: A set of a and b above

2. BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e above
a
Auto switch mounting band
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable.
Refer to pages 1263 to 1371 for the detailed specifications.
Auto switch type
Reed
Part no.
D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW

D-G5NTL
Features
D-C80
D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B
Sold state
Electrical entry (Entry direction)
D-B53, C73, C76
Without indicator light

Grommet (In-line)
Diagnosis indication (2-color indication)

With timer
For solid state switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1328 and 1329 for details.
Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H types) are also available. Refer to page 1290 for details.
A wide range detection type, solid state auto switch (D-GNBL type) is also available. Refer to page 1320 for details.
218
Fine Lock Cylinders/Lock-up Cylinder

Series CL
16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 140, 160
CLJ2
Locking
method
Spring
locking
Unlocking
Discharging
the air causes
the lock to
operate.
Features
Pneumatic
locking
Locking in both directions is possible.
Spring and
pneumatic locking
Locking in either side of cylinder stroke is CLM2

possible, too.
(The lock-up cylinder can be locked only in one CLG1
direction.)
Pressure locking
Pressure
locking
The holding
power can be
varied according
to the air
pressure that is
applied to the
port.
The holding power

c a n b e va r i e d
according to the
air pressure that is
applied to the port.
CL1
MLGC
Unlocking
Discharging the air
causes the lock to
operate.
CNG
MNB
(Lock-up cylinders are spring locking only.)
CNA
CNS
CLS
Series Variations
Series
Action
Rod
Standard variations
Auto switch
built-in magnet
With rod boot
Locking
direction
Locking method
Spring
locking
Pneumatic
locking
Spring and
Pneumatic locking
Bore size
(mm)
Standard
stroke
(mm)
CLQ
Page
RLQ
Fine lock cylinders
MLU
Series CLJ2
Double
acting
Single
rod
Both
directions
16
15
to
200
MLGP
601
ML1C
Series CLM2
Double
acting
Single
rod
Both
directions
Series CLG1
Double
acting
Single
rod
Both
directions
20
25
32
40
25
to
300
20
25 to 200
25
32
40
25
to
300
611
625
Lock-up cylinder
Series CL1
Double
acting
Single
rod
One
direction
25 to 500
40
50, 63 25 to 600
80, 100 25 to 700
125, 140 Up to 1000
160
Up to 1200
636
D-
-X
Individual
-X
595
Series CL

The precautions on these pages are for the fine lock cylinders and the lock-up cylinders.
For general actuator precautions, refer to Actuator Precautions on pages 3 to 7.
Design of Equipment and Machinery
Warning
1. Construct so that the human body will not
come into direct contact with driven objects
or the moving parts of locking cylinders.
If there is a risk of contact, provide safety
measures such as a cover or a system that
uses sensors that will activate an
emergency stop before contact is made.
2. Use a balance circuit in which lurching of
the piston is taken into consideration. If the
lock is applied at a desired position of a
stroke and compressed air is applied to
only one side of the cylinder, the piston will
lurch at a high speed the moment the lock
is disengaged. In such a situation, there is
a risk of injury to humans, or equipment
damage. To prevent the piston from
lurching, use a balance circuit such as the
recommended pneumatic circuit (P. 598). If
an air-hydro fine lock cylinder is used,
make sure to operate the lock portion
through air pressure. Never use oil on the
lock-up cylinder because the lock-up
cylinder is a non-lube style. Failure to
observe this could cause the lock to
malfunction.
Selection
Warning
Refer to the following criteria for the
maximum load in the locked state, and
set.
When a cylinder is in a no-load and locked
state, the holding force (maximum static load)
is the locks ability to hold a static load that
does not involve vibrations or shocks. To
ensure braking force, the maximum load
must be set as described below.
1. For constant static loads, such as for drop
prevention:
Fine lock series (Series CLJ2/CLM2/
CLG1)
35% or less of the holding force
(maximum static load)
Note) For applications such as drop
prevention, consider situations in which
the air source is shut off, and make
selections based on the holding force of
the spring locked state. Do not use the
pneumatic lock for drop prevention
purposes.
Lock-up series (Series CL1)
(maximum static load)
596
2. When kinetic energy acts upon the cylinder,

such as when effecting an intermediate
stop, there are constraints in terms of the
allowable kinetic energy that can be
applied to the cylinder in a locked state.
Therefore, refer to the allowable kinetic
energy of the respective ser ies.
Fur ther more, dur ing locking, the
mechanism must sustain the thrust of the
cylinder itself, in addition to absorbing the
kinetic energy. Therefore, even within a
given allowable kinetic energy level, there
is an upper limit to the amount of the load
that can be sustained.
Fine lock series (Series CLJ2/CLM2/
CLG1)
Maximum load at horizontal mounting:
(Maximum static load) for spring lock
Maximum load at vertical mounting: 35%
or less of the holding force (Maximum
static load) for spring lock
Lock-up series (Series CL1)
Maximum load at horizontal mounting:
(Maximum static load)
Maximum load at vertical mounting: 25%
or less of the holding force (Maximum
static load)
3. In a locked state, do not apply impacts,
strong vibrations or rotational forces.
Do not apply a impacts, strong vibrations or
rotational forces from external sources,
because this could damage or shorten the
life of the lock unit.
4. The locking of the fine lock cylinder is
directional.
Although the fine lock cylinder can be locked
in both directions, be aware that its holding
force is smaller in one of the directions.
CLJ2/CLM2/CLG1 Holding force at piston
rod extended side decreases approx. 15%.
5. The locking of the lock-up cylinder is
unidirectional.
Because the locking direction of the lock-up
cylinder is unidirectional, select the locking
direction in accordance with the particular
operating conditions. It is also possible to
manufacture a bidirectional lock-up cylinder.
For details, refer to Made to Order on page
1989. Due to the nature of its construction,
a lock-up cylinder has a play of
approximately 0.5 mm to 1 mm in the axial
direction. Therefore, if an external stopper is
used to stop the piston rod and the lock is
engaged, the piston rod will shift in the
amount of its axial play.
6. To effect an intermediate stop, take the

cylinders stopping precision and overrun
amount into consideration.
Because the lock is applied by mechanical
means, the piston will not stop immediately
in response to a stopping signal, but only
after a time lag. This lag determines the
amount of the overrun of the piston stroke.
Thus, the range of the maximum and
minimum amounts of the overrun is the
stopping precision.
Place the limit switch before the desired
stopping position, only in the amount of
the overrun.
The limit switch must have a detection
length (dog length) of the overrun
amount + .
For SMCs auto switches, the operating
range are between 8 and 14 mm. (It
varies depending on a switch model.)
When the overrun amount exceeds this
range, self-holding of the contact should
be performed at the switch load side.
For stopping accuracy, refer to Series CLJ
(P. 603), Series CLM2 (P. 614), Series
CLG1 (P. 627), and Series CL1 (P. 637)
respectively.
Stop signal
Overrun amount
7. In order to fur ther improve stopping

accuracy, the time from the stop signal to
the operation of the lock should be
shortened as much as possible.
To accomplish this, use a device such as a
highly responsive electric control circuit or
solenoid valve driven by direct current, and
place the solenoid valve as close as
possible to the cylinder.
8. Be aware that the stopping accuracy is
influenced by changes in the piston speed.
The variance in the stopping position
increases if the piston speed changes,
such as due to load fluctuations during the
reciprocal movement of the piston.
Therefore, take measures to ensure a
constant piston speed immediately
preceding the stopping position.
Furthermore, the variances in the stopping
position increases when the piston is
effecting a cushioning stroke or during
acceleration after starting its movement.
9. When unlocking is performed, if the thrust
is applied to the piston, unlocking will not
be easily done. To avoid that, ensure that
unlocking should be performed before the
thrust is applied to the piston.
Series CL

Mounting
Warning
1. Be certain to connect the rod end to the
load with the lock released.
If this is performed with the lock
engaged, a load that exceeds the
allowable rotational force or holding force
would be applied to the piston rod, which
could damage the locking mechanism.
The fine lock and Series CL1 with 40 to
100 cylinders have a built-in manual
unlocking mechanism. Therefore, they
can be maintained in the unlocked state
without supplying air. For Series CL1 with
125 to 160 cylinders, simply connect
piping to the lock-up port, and supply air
pressure of 0.2 MPa or more to
disengage the lock in order to attach a
load.
Caution
1. Do not apply offset loads on the piston rod.
Pay particular attention to aligning the
center of gravity of the load with the axial
center of the cylinder. If there is a large
amount of deviation, the piston rod could
become unevenly worn or damaged due
to the inertial moment that is created
when the piston rod is stopped by the
lock.
Adjustment
Caution
1. Place it in the locked position. (Excluding
the series CL1 125 to 160.)
The locks are manually disengaged at the
time the cylinders are shipped from the
factory. Therefore, make sure to change
them to the locked state before using the
cylinders. For procedures to effect the
change, refer to page 599 for the fine lock
series. Be aware that the lock will not
operate properly if the change is not
performed correctly.
Adjust the cylinder's air balance. In the
state in which a load is attached to the
cylinder, disengage the lock and adjust
the air pressure at the rod side and the
head side of the cylinder to obtain a load
balance. By maintaining a proper air
balance, the piston rod can be prevented
from lurching when the lock is
disengaged.
CLJ2
CLM2
CLG1
CL1
MLGC
CNG
MNB
CNA
CNS
2. Adjust the mounting position of detections

such as those of the auto switches. To
effect an intermediate stop, adjust the
mounting position of the auto switch
detection by taking the amount of overrun
into consideration in relation to the desired
stopping position.
CLS
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
MLGP
X Load center of gravity and cylinder

shaft center are not matched.
ML1C
Load center of gravity and cylinder

shaft center are matched.
Note) Can be used if all of the generated

moment is absorbed by an effective
guide.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
597
Series CL

Pneumatic Circuit
Caution
Warning
1. Be certain to use an pneumatic circuit which will apply
balancing pressure to both sides of the piston when in a
locked stop.
In order to prevent cylinder lurching after a lock stop, when
restarting or when manually unlocking, a circuit should be used to
which will apply balancing pressure to both sides of the piston,
thereby canceling the force generated by the load in the direction
of piston movement.
2. Use a solenoid valve for unlocking which has a large effective
area, as a rule 50% or more of the effective area of the cylinder
drive solenoid valve.
The larger the effective area is, the shorter the locking time will be
(the overrun amount will be shorter), and stopping accuracy will be
improved.
3. Place the solenoid valve for unlocking close to the cylinder,
and no farther than the cylinder drive solenoid valve.
The shorter the distance from the cylinder (the shorter the piping),
the shorter the overrun amount will be, and stopping accuracy will
be improved.
1. A 3 position pressure center solenoid valve and regulator with

check valve can be replaced with two 3 port normally open
valves and a regulator with relief function.
Cylinder side
[Example]
1) [Horizontal]
W
3 port
normally open
SOL.C
4. Allow at least 0.5 seconds from a locked stop (intermediate

stop of the cylinder) until release of the lock.
When the locked stop time is too short, the piston rod (and load)
may lurch at a speed greater than the control speed of the speed
controller.
5. When restarting, control the switching signal for the unlocking
solenoid valve so that it acts before or at the same time as the
cylinder drive solenoid valve.
If the signal is delayed, the piston rod (and load) may lurch at a
speed greater than the control speed of the speed controller.
Cylinder side
SOL.B
Regulator with relief function
SOL.A
3 port
normally
closed
2) [Vertical]
Load in the direction of
rod extension

rod retraction
W
6. Basic circuit
1) [Horizontal]
SOL.C
Forward
SOL.B
W
Backward
3 port
normally
closed
SOL.C
SOL.A
SOL.A
ON
Regulator with OFF
check valve
ON
ON
Pressure
ON
center
OFF
SOL.B
ON
ON
2) [Vertical]
rod extension
SOL.B
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SOL.C Action
OFF Forward
OFF Locked stop
OFF Unlocked
OFF Forward
ON Backward
OFF Locked stop
OFF Unlocked
ON Backward
SOL.B
0.5 s or
more
0 to 0.5 s
0.5 s or
more
0 to 0.5 s

rod retraction
W
SOL.B
SOL.C
SOL.A
SOL.A
598
SOL.C
SOL.B
SOL.A
SOL.A
SOL.C
Series CL

How to Manually Disengage the Lock and Change from the Unlocked to the Locked State
The lock is manually disengaged at the time the cylinder is shipped from the factory. Because the lock will not operate in
this state, make sure to change it to the locked state before operation, after having adjusted the axial center for
installation.
How to Change from Unlocked to Locked State
Manually Unlocking
1. Series CLJ2, CLM2, CLG1

1) Loose locking nut.
2) Turn the wrench flats section of the manual unlocking cam to the
LOCK position that is marked on the cam guide.
3) While keeping the wrench flats section in place, tighten the lock
nut.
Note) The manual unlocking cam will rotate approximately 180. Do
not rotate the wrench flats section excessively.
The lock of a fine lock series cylinder can be disengaged manually

through the procedure described below. However, make sure to
disengage the lock pneumatically before operating the cylinder.
Locked state
Manual
unlocking cam
Lock nut
Brake arm
Manually unlocked state

Brake spring
Brake piston
Note) Manual disengagement of the lock could create a greater

cylinder sliding resistance than pneumatic disengagement of
the lock.
1. Series CLJ2, CLM2, CLG1
1) Loose locking nut.
2) Supply air pressure of 0.3 MPa or more to the lock release port.
3) Turn the wrench flats section of the manual unlocking cam until it
stops at the FREE position that is marked on the cam guide.
4) While keeping the wrench flats section in place, tighten the lock
nut.
CLM2
CLG1
CL1
MLGC
CNG
MNB
CNA
CNS
FREE
Cam guide
CLJ2
LOCK and FREE are marked on the cam guide.
CLS
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
MLGP
ML1C
D-
-X
Individual
-X
599
Prior to Use
Construction Principle/Applicable Series: CLJ2, CLM2, CLG1, MLGC
Spring locking type
Tapered brake piston
Release port
Pressurized lock port

(Plug with breathing hole for spring lock)
Brake arm
Fulcrum A
(Rotary axis)
Roller
Air pressure
supply
Brake shoe
Brake spring
Application point C
Air pressure exhaust
Power point B
Unlocked state
Locked state
Spring locking (Exhaust locking)

The spring force that is applied to the tapered brake piston becomes amplified through the wedge
effect. This force becomes further amplified to the power of AB/AC through the mechanical
advantage of a lever and acts on the brake shoe, which in turn, applies a large force to tighten and
lock the piston rod. To disengage the lock, air pressure is supplied through the unlocking port, thus
disengaging the brake spring force.
Pneumatic locking type

Air pressure supply
Air pressure supply
Locked state
Unlocked state
Brake piston is operated by air pressure.
Spring and pneumatic locking type

Air pressure supply
Unlocked state
Locked state
Brake piston is operated by air pressure and spring force.
600
Air pressure supply
Fine Lock Cylinder

Series
CLM2
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
With auto switch
CLJ2
CLM2
CLM2
L 25
100
CDLM2
L 25
100
E M9BW
With auto switch
Nil
Pneumatic
Nil
Rc
Air-hydro
TN
NPT
Made to Order
Basic style
B
Axial foot style
L
Single clevis style
C
D Double clevis style
T
E
BZ
FZ

20
25
32
40

Number of
auto switches
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
2 pcs.
S
n
1 pc.
CNA
n pcs.
CNS
Without auto switch

Nil
Refer to Standard Stroke on page 612.
With rod boot

(Example) CDLM2F32-100-P
Nil
MNB
Auto switch
40 mm
CNG
Refer to page 612 for details.
Mounting style
Bore size
CL1
MLGC
Port thread type
Type
(Built-in magnet)
CLG1
Nil
None
J
K
Nylon tarpaulin
Electrical
entry
Indicator
light
Special function
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Solid state switch
Grommet
Grommet
Connector
Terminal
conduit
Yes
Reed switch
Grommet
No Yes No Yes No
Yes

Load voltage
Wiring
(Output)
DC
AC
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
5 V, 12 V
2-wire
12 V
3-wire (NPN)
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
24 V
5 V, 12 V
12 V
5 V,12 V
2-wire
12V
4-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
3-wire
(NPN equivalent)
2-wire
24 V
5V
12 V
100 V
100 V or less
100 V, 200V
200 V or less
24 V or less
Auto switch
model
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7BA
H7NF
A96
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W
CLQ
Lock operation
RLQ

E
P Pneumatic locking (Pressure locking)
Spring and pneumatic locking
D
MLU
Type
CLS

Pre-wired
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
MLGP
ML1C
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
IC circuit
Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
PLC
100 V, 200 V
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
D-A9V/M9V/M9WV/M9A(V)L types cannot be mounted.
D-A9/M9/M9W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled at the time of shipment.)
611
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Series CLM2
Specifications
Provided with a compact lock

mechanism, it is suitable for
intermediate stop, emergency
stop, and drop prevention.
20
Bore size (mm)
25
Action
32
Type
Air cylinder
Pneumatic locking (Pressurized locking), Spring and pneumatic locking
Lock operation
Fluid
Locking in both directions

The piston rod can be locked in either
direction of its cylinder stroke.
Air
Proof pressure
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
Maximum piston speed:

500 mm/s
It can be used at 50 to 500 mm/s provided
that it is within the allowable kinetic energy
range.
40
0.08 MPa
Lubrication

50 to 500 mm/s
Piston speed
Cushion

+1.4
0

Rc 1/8
Piping/Screw-in type
Rc 1/4
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style, Head
side flange style, Single clevis style, Double clevis style,
Head side trunnion style, Clevis integrated style, Bosscut basic style, Boss-cut flange style
Mounting
Constraints associated with the allowable kinetic energy are imposed on the speeds at which the piston can be locked.
The maximum speed of 750 mm/s can be accommodated if the piston is to be locked in the stationary state for the
purpose of drop prevention.
Fine Lock Specifications

Spring locking
(Exhaust locking)
Lock operation
Fluid
(For details, refer to page 1836.)
Symbol
Specifications
XA
Spring and
pneumatic locking
Pneumatic locking
(Pressure locking)
Air
0.5 MPa
Unlocking pressure
0.3 MPa or more
0.1 MPa or more
Lock starting pressure
0.25 MPa or less
0.05 MPa or more
Locking direction
Both directions
Refer to page 614 for the allowable kinetic energy when locking, holding force of spring locking and stopping accuracy.
Refer to the minimum auto switch mounting stroke (page 623) for
Standard Stroke / those with an auto switch.
Rod Boot Material

Symbol
Rod boot material
Maximum ambient
temperature
Nylon tarpaulin
70C
110C
Refer to pages 621 to 624 for cylinders

with auto switches.
Minimum auto switch mounting stroke
(detection at stroke end) and mounting
height
Operating range
612
Bore size
(mm)
Standard stroke (1)

(mm)
20
25
32
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150

200, 250, 300
Maximum stroke
(mm)
1000
1500
2000
2000
Note 1) Intermediate strokes other than listed above are produced upon receipt of order.
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not
used.)
Note 2) When exceeding 300 strokes, the allowable maximum stroke length is determined
by the stroke selection table (technical data).
Fine Lock Cylinder

Boss-cut style
Mounting Bracket and Accessory

Accessory
Standard equipment
Option
Double(3) Clevis(4)
Mounting Rod end Clevis Single knuckle pivot
nut
nut
pin knuckle joint bracket
joint
Mounting
Series CLM2
Rod
boot
Boss for the head side cover bracket is eliminated and the
total length of cylinder is shortened.
Basic style
Axial foot style
CLJ2
Single clevis style
Comparison of the full length dimension

(Versus standard type)
(mm)
Double clevis style(3)

20
25
32
CLM2
CLG1
40

Note
CL1
With pin With pin
Note 1) Mounting nut is not equipped with clevis integrated style, single clevis
style and double clevis style.
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are attached for head side trunnion style.
Note 3) Pin and retaining ring (40: cotter pin) are shipped together with double
clevis and double knuckle joint.
Mass
(kg)
20
25
32
40
Basic style
0.55
0.87
0.94
1.30
Axial foot style
0.70
1.03
1.10
1.57
Flange style
0.61
0.96
1.03
1.42
0.53
0.85
0.93
1.26
Single clevis style
0.59
0.91
0.98
1.39
Double clevis style
0.60
0.93
0.99
1.43
Trunnion style
0.59
0.94
1.00
1.40
0.54
0.85
0.92
1.27
0.60
0.94
1.01
1.39
Bore size (mm)
Basic
mass
Option
bracket
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.13
0.07
0.07
0.14
0.14
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.23
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.20
Calculation: (Example) CLM2L32-100-E

Basic mass 1.10 (Foot, 32)
Additional mass 0.08/50 stroke
Cylinder stroke 100 stroke
1.10 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 1.26 kg
20
CM-L020B
CM-F020B
Flange
CM-C020B
Single clevis
Double clevis CM-D020B
Trunnion (with nut) CM-T020B
25
32
CM-L032B
CM-F032B
CM-C032B
CM-D032B
CM-T032B
40
CM-L040B
CM-F040B
CM-C040B
CM-D040B
CM-T040B
When ordering foot bracket, order 2 pieces per cylinder.

Clevis pin and retaining ring (40: cotter pin) are shipped together with
double clevis style.
MLGC
Boss-cut basic style (BZ) Boss-cut flange style (FZ)
CNG
MNB
Air-hydro
CNA
CLM2H Mounting style
Bore size
Stroke
Rod boot
CNS
Air-hydro
Low hydraulic cylinder 1 MPa or less
Through the concurrent use of a CC series air-hydro unit, it is possible to
operate at a constant or low speeds or to effect an intermediate stop, just
like a hydraulic unit, while using pneumatic equipment such as a valve.
CLS
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
MLGP
ML1C
Specifications
Fluid
Action

Bore size (mm)
Axial foot
Mounting style
Bore size (mm)
Turbine oil (Lock portion is air)

20, 25, 32, 40
1.0 MPa
0.2 MPa
Piston speed
Cushion
Piping
Mounting
15 to 300 mm/s
Screw-in type
Basic style, Axial foot style, Rod side flange style
Head side flange style, Single clevis style
Double clevis style, Head side trunnion style
Auto switch capable

For an exterior dimension diagram to identify the mounting support
types, refer to pages 616 to 620 as the dimensions are identical to those
of standard.
D-
-X
Individual
-X
613
Series CLM2
Caution/Allowable Kinetic Energy when Locking
Holding Force of Spring Locking (Maximum static load)
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
0.26
0.42
0.67
1.19
Holding force (N)
196
313
443
784
Note) Holding force at piston rod extended side decreases approximately 15%.
Holding Force of Spring Locking (Maximum static load)

40
r
Bo
1000
Holding force (N)
1. In terms of specific load conditions, the allowable kinetic energy

indicated in the table above is equivalent to a 50% load ratio at 0.5
MPa, and a piston speed of 300 mm/sec. Therefore, if the
operating conditions are below these values, calculations are
unnecessary.
2. Apply the following formula to obtain the kinetic energy of the load.
Ek: Kinetic energy of load (J)
1
m: Load mass (kg)
2
: Piston speed (m/s)
3. The piston speed will exceed the average speed immediately
before locking. To determine the piston speed for the purpose of
obtaining the kinetic energy of load, use 1.2 times the average
speed as a guide.
4. The relation between the speed and the load of the respective tube
bores is indicated in the diagram below. Use the cylinder in the
range below the line.
5. During locking, the lock mechanism must sustain the thrust of the
cylinder itself, in addition to absorbing the energy of the load.
Therefore, even within a given allowable kinetic energy level, there
is an upper limit to the size of the load that can be sustained. Thus,
a horizontally mounted cylinder must be operated below the solid
line, and a vertically mounted cylinder must be operated below the
dotted line.
e
siz
32
500
25
20
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
Air pressure applied to pressurized locking port (MPa)

60
When selecting cylinders, refer to the Precautions and allowable kinetic

energy when locking on page 596, and then select a cylinder.
40
50
Load mass (kg)
Caution
Caution when Locking
40
32
30
40
25
20
10
32
20
25
20
50
100
200
300
400
500
Piston speed (mm/s)
Stopping Accuracy (Not including tolerance of control system.)

Locking method
(mm)
Piston speed (mm/s)
20
50
100
300
500
0.3
0.4
0.5
1.0
2.0
Pneumatic locking (Pressure locking)

0.15
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.5
Conditions: Load: 25% of thrust force at 0.5 MPa

Solenoid valve: Mounted to the lock port
20 mm/s marked with the asterisk is in the case of actuating hydraulically
by means of air-hydro type.
Caution
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit/Caution on Handling
For detailed speceifications of the fine lock cylinder, Series
CLM2 mentioned above, refer to pages 596 to 599.
Accessory
For accessory dimensions, refer to pages 144 and 145 in Best
Pneumatics No. 2, since it is same as Series CM2.
614
Holding force is the force which can hold a static load, given no
vibration or impact in a locked state. Therefore, do not use
cylinders around the maximum holding force. Note the following
points.
If the piston rod slips because the locks holding force has been
exceeded, the brake shoe could be damaged, resulting in a
reduced holding force or shortened life.
Do not use the cylinder in the locked state to sustain a load that
involves impact.
To use the lock for drop prevention purposes, the load to be
attached to the cylinder must be within 35% of the cylinders
holding force.
Fine Lock Cylinder

Series CLM2
Construction (Not able to disassemble)

CLJ2
CLM2
CLG1
CL1
MLGC
CNG
MNB
CNA
Pneumatic locking (Pressure locking)
CNS
CLS
CLQ
RLQ
MLU
MLGP
ML1C
Component Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Description
Rod cover
Head cover
Cover
Intermediate cover
Cylinder tube
Piston rod
Piston
Brake piston
Brake arm
Brake shoe
Roller
Pin
Retaining ring
Brake spring
Bushing
Bushing
Retaining ring
Manual lock release cam
Cam guide
Lock nut
Flat washer
Retaining ring
Hexagon socket head cap screw
Material
Note
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Aluminum alloy
Clear anodized
Carbon steel
Nitrided, chrome plated
Aluminum alloy
Hard anodized
Stainless steel
Hard chrome plated
Carbon steel
Chromated
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
Nitrided
Carbon steel
Nitrided
Special friction material
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Carbon tool steel
Nickel plated
Spring steel wire
Dacrodized
Oil-impregnated sintered alloy
Oil-impregnated sintered alloy
Carbon tool steel
Nickel plated
Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
Carbon steel
Nitrided, painted
Rolled steel
Nickel plated
Rolled steel
Nickel plated
Carbon tool steel
Nickel plated
Chromium molybdenum steel
Nickel plated
No.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Description
Material
Spring washer
Steel wire
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel
Spring washer
Steel wire
Hexagon socket head cap screw Chromium molybdenum steel
Spring washer
Steel wire
Bumper A
Urethane
Bumper B
Urethane
Wear ring
Resin
Wear ring
Resin
Hexagon socket head plug
Carbon steel
Element
Bronze
Piston seal
NBR
Piston gasket
NBR
Brake piston seal
NBR
Rod seal A
NBR
Rod seal B
NBR
Middle cover gasket A
NBR
Middle cover gasket B
NBR
Cam gasket
NBR
Mounting nut
Carbon steel
Rod end nut
Carbon steel
Note
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
Type E only
Type E only
D-
-X
Nickel plated
Nickel plated
615
Individual
-X
Series
CLM2
Basic Style (B)

CLM2B Bore size
Stroke
Standard style
BQ (Rc, NPT) locking port for pressurizing
BP (Rc, NPT) unlocking port
(Plug cap with breathing port at spring lock)

P (Rc, NPT)
Rod side cylinder port
Unlocked when pressurized
Manual unlocking cam

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT)
Head side cylinder port
2 x NN
NA
Boss-cut style
NA
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
With rod boot

8
JH
ZZ + Stroke
JW
f
h
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore (mm) Stroke range
20
25
32
40
A AL B1 B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
18 15.5 13
22 19.5 17
22 19.5 17
24 21 22
26
32
32
41
38 80
45 90
45 90
52 100.5
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
57.5
69
69
76
GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ GR H
8
10
12
14
20 00.033
26 00.033
26 00.033
32 00.039
13
13
13
16
73.5 8
83.5 8
83.5 8
90.5 11
(mm)
Bore (mm) K
5
20
5.5
25
5.5
32
7
40
MM
M8 x 1.25 15
M10 x 1.25 15
M10 x 1.25 15
M14 x 1.5 21.5
NA
NN
24
30
34.5
42.5
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2
18
18
18
14
PG PH PL PW S
22 19.5 20
27 24 24
27 24 24
29 24 24
38
41
41
41
127
137
139
167
ZZ
181
195
197
233
8
9
9
8
55 3.5
64.5 4
64.5 4
70
4
6
9
9
11
4
7
7
8
4
7
7
7
41
45
45
50
H1 H2
5
6
6
8
Boss-cut
Bore (mm) ZZ
168
20
182
25
184
32
217
40
With Rod Boot
(mm)
Bore (mm)
20
25
32
40
36
36
36
46
17
17
17
19
616
28
8
8 33.5
8 37.5
10 46.5
h
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
68
81
93
106
131
72
85
97
110
135
72
85
97
110
135
77
90
102
115
140
l
1 to 50 51 to 100
12.5
25
12.5
25
12.5
25
12.5
25
101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 1 to 50 51 to 100

37.5
50
75
208
221
37.5
50
75
222
232
37.5
50
75
224
237
37.5
50
75
260
273
ZZ
101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300
233
246
271
247
260
285
249
262
287
285
298
323
JH
JW
(Reference) (Reference)
23.5
23.5
23.5
23.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
Fine Lock Cylinder

Series
CLM2

CLM2L Bore size

P (Rc, NPT)
Stroke

Lock nut
CLJ2
P (Rc, NPT)
2 x NN
CLM2
CLG1
4 x LD

CL1

S + Stroke
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
2 x LC
MLGC
(mm)
20
25
32
40
Up to 400
Up to 450
Up to 450
Up to 500
AL
B1
B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ
18 15.5
22 19.5
22 19.5
24 21
40
47
47
54
13
17
17
22
26
32
32
41
38
45
45
52
80
90
90
100.5
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
63.5
74.5
74.5
80
GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ GR
8
10
12
14
13
13
13
16
73.5
83.5
83.5
90.5
8
8
8
11
8
9
9
8
55 3.5
64.5 4
64.5 4
70
4
6
9
9
11
4
7
7
8
4
7
7
7
H1
H2
CNG
41
45
45
50
5
6
6
8
8
8
8
10
MNB
CNA
(mm)
Bore (mm)
20
25
32
40
5
5.5
5.5
7
LC LD LH LS
4
4
4
4
6.8
6.8
6.8
7
25
28
28
30
167
177
179
213
LT
LX LZ
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
40
40
40
55
55
55
55
75
MM
NA
NN
M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5

M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
18
18
18
14
PG PH PL PW
22 19.5
27 24
27 24
29 24
20
24
24
24
38
41
41
41
ZZ
127
137
139
167
20
20
20
23
8
8
8
10
21
25
25
27
196
210
212
250
CNS
CLS
CLQ

CLM2G Bore size
RLQ
Stroke

MLU
P (Rc, NPT)
MLGP
ML1C
x
40
Mounting holes
x
Width across
Lock nut
flats B1
P (Rc, NPT)

S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Bore (mm)
20
25
32
40
Stroke range
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
AL
B1
B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ
18
22
22
24
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
34
40
40
52
13
17
17
22
26
32
32
41
38
45
45
52
80
90
90
100.5
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
H1
H2
MM
41
45
45
50
5
6
6
8
8
8
8
10
5
5.5
5.5
7
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M14 x 1.5
Mounting holes
20 to 32
(mm)
C1
57.5 30
69 37
69 37
76 47.3
8
10
12
14
20 00.033
26 00.033
0
26 0.033
0
32 0.039
13
13
13
16
NA
NN
FD FT FX FY FZ GA GB
7
7
7
7
4
4
4
5
60
60
60
66
36
75
75
75
82
73.5
83.5
83.5
90.5
ZZ
127
137
139
167
172
186
188
222
181
195
197
233
8
8
8
11
(mm)
Bore (mm)
20
25
32
40
GC GD GK GL GQ GR
8
9
9
8
55 3.5
64.5 4
64.5 4
70
4
6
9
9
11
4
7
7
8
4
7
7
7
15 24 M20 x 1.5
15 30 M26 x 1.5
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
18
18
18
14
PG PH PL PW
22
27
27
29
19.5
24
24
24
20
24
24
24
38
41
41
41
D-
-X
Individual
-X
617
Series
CLM2

CLM2F Bore size
Stroke
P (Rc, NPT)

4 x FD
Mounting holes
40
P (Rc, NPT)
Lock nut
NA
NA
2 x FD
Mounting holes
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
20 to 32
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
20
Up to 400
25
Up to 450
32
Up to 450
40
Up to 500
AL
18 15.5 34
22 19.5 40
22 19.5 40
24 21 52
B1 B2 BC BN BP BQ BZ C1
13
17
17
22
26
32
32
41
38 80
45 90
45 90
52 100.5
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
20 00.033
26 00.033
26 00.033
32 00.039
13
13
13
16
8
57.5 30
69 37 10
69 37 12
76 47.3 14
FD FT FX FY FZ GA GB GC GD GK
60
60
60
66
36
PG PH PL PW S
ZZ
22 19.5 20
27 24 24
27 24 24
29 24 24
37
41
41
45
181
195
197
233
7
7
7
7
4
4
4
5
75
75
75
82
(mm)
Bore (mm) GL GQ GR H
20
6
4
4
41
25
9
7
7
45
32
9
7
7
45
40
11
8
7
50
618
H1 H2
5
6
6
8
MM
N NA
28
5 M8 x 1.25 15
8
8 33.5 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15
8 37.5 5.5 M10 x 1.25 15
10 46.5 7 M14 x 1.5 21.5
24
30
34.5
42.5
NN
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2
18
18
18
14
38
41
41
41
127
137
139
167
73.5
83.5
83.5
90.5
8
8
8
11
8
9
9
8
55 3.5
64.5 4
64.5 4
70 4
Boss-cut
Bore (mm) ZZ
20
168
25
182
32
184
40
217
Fine Lock Cylinder

Series
CLM2

CLM2C Bore size
Stroke

P (Rc, NPT)


Lock nut
CLJ2
P (Rc, NPT)
CLM2
NA
CLG1
CL1
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
NA
MLGC
(mm)
Bore (mm)
20
25
32
40
Stroke range
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
A
18
22
22
24
B1
BC BN BP BQ BZ
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
13
17
17
22
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
57.5
69
69
76
NA
AL
38
45
45
52
Bore (mm)
GR
H1
20
25
32
40
4
7
7
7
41
45
45
50
5
6
6
8
28
33.5
37.5
46.5
5
5.5
5.5
7
30
30
30
39
80
90
90
100.5
MM
CD CX
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
15
8
10
12
14
NN
24 M20 x 1.5
M8 x 1.25 15
M10 x 1.25
15
30 M26 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25
15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
18
18
18
14
20
26
26
32
0
0.033
0
0.033
0
0.033
0
0.039
GA GB GC
GD GK GL GQ
13
13
13
16
73.5
83.5
83.5
90.5
55
64.5
64.5
70
8
8
8
11
PG PH
PL PW RR
22
27
27
29
20
24
24
24
19.5
24
24
24
38
41
41
41
9
9
9
11
8
9
9
8
3.5
4
4
4
6
9
9
11
ZZ
127
137
139
167
14
14
14
18
198
212
214
256
207
221
223
267
4
7
7
8
MNB
CNA
CNS
CLS
CLQ
RLQ

CLM2D Bore size
CNG
Stroke
MLU

P (Rc, NPT)
MLGP
ML1C

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT)
NA
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
NA
(mm)
AL
B1
BC BN BP BQ BZ
20
25
32
40
Stroke range
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
Up to 300
18
22
22
24
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
13
17
17
22
38
45
45
52
80
90
90
100.5
Bore (mm)
GQ GR
H1
Bore (mm)
20
25
32
40
4
7
7
8
4
7
7
7
41
45
45
50
5
6
6
8
28
33.5
37.5
46.5
5
5.5
5.5
7
30
30
30
39
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
MM
CD CX CZ
GA GB GC GD GK
19
19
19
30
8
10
12
14
20 00.033
26 00.033
0
26 0.033
0
32 0.039
13
13
13
16
73.5
83.5
83.5
90.5
PG PH
57.5
69
69
76
9
9
9
10
NA
10
10
10
15
NN
M8 x 1.25 15
24 M20 x 1.5
30 M26 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25 15
M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
18
18
18
14
22
27
27
29
19.5
24
24
24
GL
8
8
8
11
8
9
9
8
55
64.5
64.5
70
3.5
4
4
4
6
9
9
11
PL PW RR
ZZ
127
137
139
167
14
14
14
18
198
212
214
256
207
221
223
267
20
24
24
24
38
41
41
41
9
9
9
11
Clevis pin and snap ring (40: cotter pin) are shipped together.
619
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Series
CLM2

CLM2T Bore size
Stroke

P (Rc, NPT)

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT)
Width
across flats B2

S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
20
Up to 300
25
Up to 300
32
Up to 300
40
Up to 300
AL
B1
B2
BC BN BP BQ BZ
GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ
18
22
22
24
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
13
17
17
22
26
32
32
41
38
45
45
52
80
90
90
100.5
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
8
10
12
14
20 00.033
26 00.033
0
26 0.033
0
32 0.039
13
13
13
16
73.5
83.5
83.5
90.5
NA
Bore (mm)
GR
H1
20
25
32
40
4
7
7
7
41
45
45
50
5
6
6
8
5
5.5
5.5
7
MM
NN
24 M20 x 1.5
M8 x 1.25 15
30 M26 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25 15
M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
57.5
69
69
76
PG PH
PL PW
22
27
27
29
20
24
24
24
18
18
18
14
19.5
24
24
24
38
41
41
41
127
137
139
167
6
9
9
11
4
7
7
8
8
9
9
8
55
64.5
64.5
70
3.5
4
4
4
TD TT
TX
TY
TZ
ZZ
10
10
10
11
32
40
40
53
32
40
40
53
52
60
60
77
173
187
189
222.5
183
197
199
233
8
9
9
10
8
8
8
11

CLM2E Bore size
Stroke
P (Rc, NPT)

Lock nut
P (Rc, NPT)
NA
NA
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
20
Up to 300
25
Up to 300
32
Up to 300
40
Up to 300
AL
B1
BC
BN BP BQ BZ
18
22
22
24
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
13
17
17
22
38
45
45
52
80
90
90
100.5
Bore (mm)
GR
H1
20
25
32
40
4
7
7
7
41
45
45
50
5
6
6
8
28
33.5
37.5
46.5
5
5.5
5.5
7
12
12
15
15
620
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
57.5
69
69
76
NA
MM
CD CX
GA GB GC GD GK GL GQ
8
8
10
10
8
10
12
14
20 00.033
26 00.033
0
26 0.033
0
32 0.039
13
13
13
16
73.5
83.5
83.5
90.5
12
12
20
20
NN
M8 x 1.25 15
24 M20 x 1.5
30 M26 x 1.5
M10 x 1.25 15
M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
8
8
8
11
PG
PH
PL PW RR
18
18
22
27
27
29
19.5
24
24
24
20
24
24
24
18
14
38
41
41
41
9
9
12
12
8
9
9
8
55
64.5
64.5
70
3.5
4
4
4
6
9
9
11
ZZ
127
137
139
167
11.5
11.5
14.5
14.5
180
194
199
232
189
203
211
244
4
7
7
8
CLM2
Series

ND
(mm)
I-020B/032B
Y (Max.)
MM
(mm)
I-040B
R1
ND
MM
U1
H
Z (Min.)
R2
ND
E1
NX
NX1
A1
L1
A
R1
CLJ2
E1
MM
U1
A1
CLM2
L1
A
U1
NX
CLG1
Bore size
MM
NDH10
NX1
U1
R2
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
A A1 E1 L1
NDH10
NX
R1 U1
20
25, 32
40
18
41
M8 x 1.25
9 + 00.058
9 0.1
0.2
14
10
11
66
20
25, 32
40
9 0.1
0.2
10 14
9 0.1
0.2
16 0.1
0.3
I-020B
I-032B
I-040B
46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9 + 00.058
9 + 00.058
12 + 00.070
9 + 00.058
12 + 00.070
9 0.1
0.2
10 14
22
45
M10 x 1.25
24
50
M14 x 1.5
14
10
14
69
20
14
13
92

ND hole H10
MM
48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25
69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5
16 0.1
0.3 15.5 20
MLGC
CNG
(mm)
Y (Max.)
MM
CL1
MNB
Axis d9
CNA
CNS
NX2
L
A
U2
H
Z (Min.)
R2
Bore size
20
25, 32
40
MM
CLS
ND
NX2
R2
U2
+
9 + 0.2
0.1
+
9 + 0.2
0.1
16 ++ 0.3
0.1
10
14
11
66
10
14
14
69
13
25
13
92
18
41
25
M8 x 1.25
22
45
25
M10 x 1.25
24
50
49.7 M14 x 1.5
12
CLQ
RLQ
MLU

Y-020B/Y-032B
(mm)
Y-040B
R1
MM
MLGP
Material: Cast iron
ML1C
R1
ND hole H10
ND hole H10
MM
Axis d9
A1
NX
NZ
L
E1
NX
NZ
L
E1
Axis d9
U1
L1
A
Part no.
Y-020B
Y-032B
Y-040B
A1
U1
L1
A
Applicable
bore size
A1
E1
20
46
16
20
25, 32
48
18
40
68
22
MM
L1
Retaining ring
Cotter pin
ND
NX
NZ
R1
U1
Applicable pin
part number
+
9 + 0.2
0.1
+
9 + 0.2
0.1
16 ++ 0.3
0.1
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
38
13
25
CDP-3
3 x 18 l
25
36
M8 x 1.25
20
25
38
M10 x 1.25
24
49.7
55
M14 x 1.5
12
size

CDP-1
2 x 3
Through hole
Bore size/40
CDP-3
D-
2 x 3
Through hole
-X
Cotter pin
3 x 18 l
(mm)
CDP-1
Bore size/40
CDP-2
(mm)
Cotter pin
3 x 18 l
620-1
Individual
-X
CLM2
Series
Rod End Nut
(mm)
Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CLM2E)
(mm)
LC hole + 0.15
0.05
LR
NT-02
NT-03
NT-04
20
25, 32
40
13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25
17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25
22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5
LT
Applicable
bore size
LF
LE
LH
Axis 0.040
0.076
Part no.
L
LV
LX
LG
2 x LD
LY
Mounting Nut
(mm)
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
20
SN-020B
SN-032B 25, 32
40
SN-040B
CM-E020B
CM-E032B
20, 25
32, 40
24.5
6.8
22
15
30
30
10
3.2
12
59 18.4
CD-S02
34
10
25
15
40
40
13
20
75
CD-S03
part no.
Clevis Pin (For CLM2E)
(mm)
26
30
25.5 M20 x 1.5
32
37
31.5 M26 x 1.5
41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10
Trunnion Nut
(mm)
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
CD-S02
CD-S03
20, 25
32, 40

B
l
L
28
d
D
Applicable
bore size
Part no.
t
Applicable
retaining
ring part no.
Dd9
8 0.040
0.076
7.6
24.5
19.5
1.6
0.9
Type C 8 for axis
10 0.040
0.076
9.6
34
29
1.35
1.15
Type C 10 for axis
Note) Retaining rings are attached.
Part no.
Applicable
bore size
20
TN-020B
TN-032B 25, 32
40
TN-040B
26
28 25.5 M20 x 1.5
10
32
34 31.5 M26 x 1.5
10
41
45 40.5 M32 x 2
10
620-2
Fine Lock Cylinder

Series
CLM2
Single Clevis
Z + Stroke
CX
CD
90
51
40
3.2
6.8
7.5
20.5
40
57
CLJ2
LX
LZ
6.8 x 3.4
CLM2
Rotation Angle
(mm)
Bore size
(mm)
A + B + 90
20
25, 32
40
25
21
26
85
81
86
200
192
202
Mounting
CLM2C
(Single clevis
style)
Part no.
Applicable bore size CX
20
25
32
40
CM-B032
CM-B040
Z + Stroke
198
212
214
256
10
15
CD
LX
LZ
44
60
10
49
65
CLG1
CL1
MLGC
CNG
Head Side Trunnion
MNB
TX
Z + Stroke
CNA
CD
7.5
51
CLS
CLQ
20.5
6.8
40
3.2
CNS
6.8 x 3.4
40
57
LX
LZ
RLQ
(mm)
Part no.
Applicable bore size
TX
CM-B020
20
25
32
40
32
Mounting
CLM2T
(Head side trunnion)
CM-B032
CM-B040
40
53
Head side trunnion

Z + Stroke
173
187
189
222.5
MLU
CD
LX
LZ
66
82
MLGP
74
90
ML1C
10
87
103
Pivot Bracket
Pivot Bracket Pin (For CM2C)
2 brackets per set

40
3.
CD +0.15
+0.05
11
40
5.2
5.2
40
.8
3.2
28
28
(mm)
57
57
Applicable
Part no.
bore size
(mm)
Part no.
CM-B020 (2)
CM-B032
CM-B040
Dd9
11
CD +0.15
+0.05
3.
25
3.
17 0.2
7.5
170.2
25
3.
6.8
.8
40
3.4
6.8
3.4
3.2
7.5
6
CD
8
9
10
Note 1) Pivot brackets do not come with pivot

bracket pins and retaining rings.
Note 2) Only for trunnion type
Dd9
Applicable
retaining
ring part no.
8.6 25 19.2 1.75 1.15 Type C 9 for axis

20 to 32 CDP-1 9 0.040
0.076
40
9.6 34 29 1.75 1.15 Type C 10 for axis
CD-S03 10 0.040
0.076
Note) Pivot bracket pins come with retaining rings.
620-3
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Fine Lock Cylinder

Series
CLM2
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Reed auto switch
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
Hs
Hs
8.5
Auto switch
8.5
Auto switch
16.5
16.5
CLJ2
B
22
(24.5)
CLM2
A
22
CLG1
( ): For D-A93
D-C7/C8
CL1
D-H7/H7W/H7NF/H7BAL
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
8.5
Auto switch
8.5
MLGC
SMC
SMC
16
CNG
MNB
16
26
29
CNA
D-B5/B6/B59W
CNS
D-G5NTL
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
12
CLS
15
12
33
24.5
24.5
CLQ
B
6.5
33
Auto switch
G 1 2 (Applicable cable O.D. 6.8 to 11.5)
Hs
MLU
D-G39A/K39A
D-A33A/A34A
MLGP
49
ML1C
49
36
36
Auto switch
RLQ
Auto switch
D-A44A
D-H7C
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
8.5
36
SMC
SMC
16
49.5
38.2
D-C73C/C80C
Hs
Auto switch
8.5
-X
SMC
SMC
16
D-
36.7
Individual
-X
621
Series
CLM2
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position
(mm)
Auto switch
model
D-M9
D-M9W
D-A9
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
D-C7
D-C80
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
5.5
10.5
9.5
0.5
2.5
1.5
6.5
5.5
10.5
9.5
0.5
2.5
1.5
7.5
6.5
11.5
10.5
1.5
0.5
3.5
2.5
13.5
11.5
17.5
15.5
13
12
10
6.5
5.5
12
11
8.5
7.5
Auto switch
model
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
622
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
D-H7C
(mm)
D-C7
D-C80
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
22
25.5
22.5
25
60
69.5
24.5
28
25
27.5
62.5
72
28
31.5
28.5
31
66
75.5
32
35.5
32.5
35
70
79.5
D-G5NTL
20
25
32
40
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
6.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
Bore size
(mm)
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
Fine Lock Cylinder

Series
CLM2

n: No. of auto switches (mm)
No. of auto switches mounted

Auto switch
model
Different surfaces
Same surface
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
10
15 Note 1)
45
D-C7
D-C80
10
15
50
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7BAL/H7NF
10
15
60
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-H7C
10
15
65
D-B5/B64
D-G5NTL
10
15
75
D-B59W
15
20
75
D-A3A/G39A
D-K39A/A44A
10
35
100
Note 1)
Different surfaces
Same surface
(n 2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
45 + 45 (n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
50 + 45 (n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
60 + 45 (n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
65 + 50 (n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
75 + 55 (n 2)
(n 2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
75 + 55 (n 2)
15 + 45
15 + 45
15 + 45
15 + 50
15 + 50
20 + 50
35 + 30 (n 2)
CLJ2
CLM2
CLG1
CL1
MLGC
CNG
MNB
CNA
100 + 100 (n 2)
CNS
Note 1) Auto switch mounting (The adjustment as shown in the figures below is required with the following stroke ranges.)
CLS

Different surfaces Note 1)
A-6
Same surface Note 1)
CLQ
6
15
RLQ
MLU
MLGP
Auto switch model

Auto switch
D-M9
D-M9W
ML1C
B-6

switch holder edge.

D-A93
D-M9
D-M9W
Operating Range
(mm)
Auto switch model
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
3.5
3.5
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B64
D-A3A/A44A
D-
12
12
13
13
-X
4.5
8.5
10
D-B59W
D-H7/H7W/H7BAL
D-G5NTL/H7NF
D-H7C
D-G39A/K39A
Individual
-X
Since the operating range is provided as a guideline including hysteresis,

it cannot be guaranteed (assuming approximately 30% dispersion). It
may vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
623
Series
CLM2
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket: Part No.

Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
20
25
32
40
q BM2-020 (1)
w BJ3-1
q BM2-025 (1)
w BJ3-1
q BM2-032 (1)
w BJ3-1
q BM2-040 (1)
w BJ3-1
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7BAL
D-H7NF
BM2-020
BM2-025
BM2-032
BM2-040
D-B5/B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
D-G5NBL
BA2-020
BA2-025
BA2-032
BA2-040
D-A3A/A44A
D-G39A/K39A
BM3-020
BM3-025
BM3-032
BM3-040
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
Note 1) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are used as a set.
[Mounting screw set made of stainless steel]

The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is available. Use it in accordance with the
operating environment. (Please order the auto switch mounting bracket separately, since it is not included.)
BBA4: For D-C7/C8/H7 types
Note 2) Refer to page 1814 for the details of BBA4.
D-H7BAL auto switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above
when shipped. When an auto switch is shipped independently, BBA4 is attached.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
b
c
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
Auto switch
Set screw (Not used)
q BM-2: A set of a and b in the figures.

w BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e in the figures.
a
Besides the models listed in How to Order, the following auto switches are applicable.
Refer to pages 1719 to 1827 for the detailed specifications.
Auto switch type
Reed
Part no.
D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW

D-G5NTL
Features
D-C80
D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B
Solid state
Electrical entry (Fetching direction)
D-B53, C73, C76

Grommet (In-line)
Diagnostic indication (2-color)

With timer
For solid state auto switches, auto switches with a pre-wired connector are also available. Refer to pages 1784 and 1785 for details.
Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H types) are also available. Refer to page 1746 for details.
Wide range detection type, solid state auto switches (D-G5NBL type) are also available. Refer to page 1776 for details.
624
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1148
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Mounting style
B
L
F
G
C
D
U
Basic style
Axial foot style
Single clevis style
Double clevis style

FZ
Boss-cut rod side

flange style
UZ
Boss-cut rod side

trunnion style

Refer to "Standard Stroke" on page 1149.
CM2X L 40
With auto switch
150
150 M9BW
CDM2X L 40
With auto switch
Number of auto switches
Thread type
(Built-in magnet)
Low speed cylinder
Bore size
20
25
32
40

(Example) CDM2XF32-100
20 mm
Nil
Rc
TN
TF
NPT
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
1 pc.
Auto switch
25 mm
Nil
32 mm
Without auto switch

model, refer to the table below.
40 mm
Solid state switch
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Grommet
Indicator light
Wiring
(Output)
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
Load voltage
DC
Lead wire (m)

Pre-wired
0.5 1 3 5 None connector
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Applicable
load
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7NF

A96
IC circuit
100 V
100 V or less
100 V, 200 V
200 V or less
24 V or less
A93

IC circuit
5 V, 12 V
12 V
2-wire
Connector
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (NPN)
Terminal
24 V
conduit Yes
12 V
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
Diagnostic
5 V, 12 V
indication
3-wire (PNP)
Grommet
(2-color)
12 V
2-wire
5 V, 12 V
4-wire (NPN)
With diagnostic output (2-color)
3-wire
5V
Yes (Equiv. NPN)
Grommet
AC
Auto switch
model
IC circuit
IC circuit Relay,
PLC
IC circuit
IC circuit
Reed switch
No
A90
Yes
B54
Relay,
PLC
No
B64
12 V
Yes
C73C
Connector
2-wire
24 V
IC circuit
No
C80C
PLC
A33A
Terminal
conduit
A34A
100 V, 200 V
Yes
Relay,
DIN terminal
A44A
PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color) Grommet

B59W
Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m Nil (Example) M9NW Solid state auto switches marked with are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m M (Example) M9NWM D-A9V/M9V/M9WV/M9A(V)L types cannot be mounted.
3 m L (Example) M9NWL Do not add the suffix (N) indicating no lead wire to the part numbers of models D-A3A,
A44A, G39A and K39A.
In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1161.
Refer to pages 1784 and 1785 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector.
D-A9/M9/M9W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.)
1148
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1149
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X
Specifications
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
Type
Action
Fluid
Air
Proof pressure
JIS Symbol
Double acting
Single rod
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.025 MPa

Cushion
Bore size
(mm)
Rubber bumper
Lubrication
Standard Stroke
40
Pneumatic

+1.4 mm
0
Piston Speed
20
25
32
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is

possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Precautions
Precautions.
Warning
When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe
fitting into the port, the coupling portion of the
cover could break if the cover rotated.
Axial foot
0.65
1.2
Flange
CM-F020B
Single clevis
CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B Single clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.
Double clevis (with pin)
CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B
Trunnion (with nut)
CM-T020B
CM-F032B
CM-T032B
CM-F040B Flange 1 pc., Mounting nut 1 pc.

Double clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.,
Clevis pin 1 pc., Retaining ring 2 pcs.
Trunnion 1 pc.,
CM-T040B
Trunnion nut 1 pc.
REA
Accessory
When replacing the rod seal, take care that the

retaining ring does not spring out while you are
removing it.
Maintenance
Caution
1. Replacement parts/Seal kit
Order it in accordance with the bore size.
Contents
CM2X20-PS
Rod seal:
0.4
Bore size (mm)

Description (when ordering
Minimum
a minimum number)
20
25 32
40
order
2
CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B Foot 2 pcs., Mounting nut 1 pc.
Mounting bracket
1. Be careful of the retaining ring to pop out.
CM2X32-PS
0.27
Caution
CM2X25-PS
40
When ordering foot brackets, order 2 pieces per cylinder unit.

Three liners are included in the clevis bracket for adjusting an angle when mounting it.
Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for 40) are shipped together.
20
25
32
40
32
0.5 to 300
Kit no.
25
Piston speed (mm/s)
40
Bore size
(mm)
20
Bore size (mm)
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150

200, 250, 300
1 pc.
Grease pack (10 g): 1 pc.
CM2X40-PS
2. Grease pack
When maintenance requires only grease,
use the following part numbers to order.
Grease pack part no.:
GR-L-005 (5 g)
GR-L-010 (10 g)
GR-L-150 (150 g)
Mounting
Option
REB
Single Double (3) Clevis (4)

knuckle knuckle
bracket
joint
joint
REC
Standard equipment
Mounting Rod end
nut
nut
Clevis
pin
Basic style
(1 pc.)
Axial foot style
(2)
(1)
(1)
Note 1)
Single clevis style
Note 1)
Double clevis style (3)
Note 1)
Note 5)
(1)Note 2)
(1)Note 2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Note 1) Mounting nut is not equipped with clevis integrated style, single clevis style and double clevis style.
Note 3) Pin and retaining ring are shipped together with double clevis and double knuckle joint. (40 is
cotter pin.)
Note 4) Pins and retaining rings are packed with clevis brackets.
Note 5) Retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are included in the clevis pins.
1149
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1150
Series CM2X
Basic Style (B)
CM2XB
Bore size
Stroke
G

2 x NN
MM
AL
A
K
H

2 x FL
N
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
NA
2 x Eh8
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
NA
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
FL
H1
H2
KA
MM
NA
NN
20
18
15.5
13
26
0
20 0.033
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
0
26 0.033
13
10.5
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
0
26 0.033
13
10.5
45
37.5 5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
40
24
21
22
41
14
0
32 0.039
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
Boss-cut Style
ZZ
M20 x 1.5
62
116
M26 x 1.5
62
120
34.5 M26 x 1.5
64
122
88
154
M32 x 2
(mm)
Bore size (mm)

20
ZZ
103
25
107
32
109
40
138

Bore size
H
K
F G
H2
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
G F

I
A
AL
H1
Stroke
2 x LC
LH
CM2XL
4 x LD
MM
N
LT

S + Stroke
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
LX
LZ
(mm)
F FL G
H H1 H2
MM
N NA
NN
Z ZZ
20
18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5
8 28 5
4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 20 8 21 131
25
22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 33.5 5.5 8
4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 20 8 25 135
32
22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 20 8 25 137
40
24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4
1150
7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
88 23 10 27 171
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1151
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X

Stroke
2 x FD
MM
FX
FZ
Mounting hole
40

FY
C2
Mounting hole
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
AL
A
Width across
flats KA
20 to 32
H2
2 x NN
E
I
4 x FD
CM2XF Bore size
FT
N
K
Z
H

2 x FL
1.5
N
F
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B
B1 B2 C2
25
32
40
F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G
H1 H2
K KA
MM
N NA
NN
Z ZZ
0
20 0.033 13 10.5
0
13 10.5
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 0.033
60 75
41
28
M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 37 116
60 75
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 41 120
0
13 10.5
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 0.033
0
16 13.5
24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 0.039
60 75
45
37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 41 122
66 36 82 11 50
10 46.5
12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
88 45 154
18 15.5 34 13 26 30
20
Boss-cut Style
(mm)
Bore size (mm)

20
103
25
107
32
109
40
138
ZZ
REA
Stroke
REB
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
AL
A

K
H
2 x FD
4 x FD
Mounting hole
Mounting
hole
E
D
MM
Width across
flats KA

C2
Width across flats B1 H1 2 x NN
H2
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CX
FX
FZ
N
FT
40
MQ
20 to 32
(mm)
F
FL
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
H1
H2
13
10.5
60
75
41
28
13
10.5
60
75
45
33.5
13
10.5
60
75
45
37.5
16
13.5
66
36
82
11
50
10
46.5
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
C2
20
18
15.5
34
13
26
30
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
52
22
41
47.3
14
32 0.039
Bore size (mm)
KA
MM
NA
NN
ZZ
20
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
62
107
116
25
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
62
111
120
32
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
64
113
122
40
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
M32 x 2
88
143
154
REC
CY
FY
CM2XG Bore size
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1151
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1152
Series CM2X
Stroke
CD
H1 NN
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
E
D
CI
NA
CM2XC Bore size
AL
A
MM
CX
K
H
NA
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
RR
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A
AL B1
FL
H1
13 10.5
41
28
13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
13 10.5
45
16 13.5 11 50
46.5
CI CD CX
20
18 15.5 13 24
10
20 0.033
25
22 19.5 17 30
10 10
26 0.033
32
22 19.5 17 30
10 12
26 0.033
40
24 21 22 38 10 15 14
32 0.039
MM
30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 14 133 142
30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 14 137 146
37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 14 139 148
N NA
NN
RR
11 88 18 177 188
12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
ZZ
K KA

Stroke
+0.058
CD hole H10 0
H1 NN
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
CL
I
E
D
CI
0.040
Axis d9 0.076
NA
CM2XD Bore size
AL
A
MM
N
K
CX
N
L
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CZ
NA
RR
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D
F FL G
H1
13 10.5 8
41
28
30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 14 133 142
13 10.5 8
45
6 33.5 5.5 8
30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 14 137 146
13 10.5 8
45
6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 14 139 148
16 13.5 11 50
20
18 15.5 13
24 25 10 19
200.033
25
22 19.5 17
30 25 10 19 10
260.033
32
22 19.5 17
30 25 10 19 12
260.033
40
24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14
320.039
K KA L
5
8 46.5 7
MM
N NA
NN
12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
P RR S
Z ZZ
11 88 18 177 188
Clevis pin and retaining ring (cotter pin for bore size 40) are shipped together.
1152
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1153
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X

CM2XU Bore size
Stroke
G
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
E
I
TY
TD
MM
TX
TZ
AL
A
K
Z
H

2 x FL
TT
N
N
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
E
Bore size (mm)

20
25
32
40
A
18
22
22
24
AL
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
B1
13
17
17
22
B2
26
32
32
41
D
8
10
12
14
0
20 0.033
0
26 0.033
0
26 0.033
0
32 0.039
Bore size (mm)

20
25
32
40
S
62
62
64
88
TD
8
9
9
10
TT
10
10
10
11
TX
32
40
40
53
TY
32
40
40
53
TZ
52
60
60
77
F
13
13
13
16
Z
36
40
40
44.5
FL
10.5
10.5
10.5
13.5
G
8
8
8
11
H
41
45
45
50
H1
5
6
6
8
I
28
33.5
37.5
46.5
K
5
5.5
5.5
7
KA
6
8
10
12
MM
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M14 x 1.5
N
15
15
15
21.5
NA
24
30
34.5
42.5
NN
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2
(mm)
ZZ
116
120
122
154
Boss-cut Style
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
(mm)
ZZ
103
107
109
138
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1153
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1154
Series CM2X
CM2XT Bore size
Stroke
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
TD
TY
E
D
2 x NN
MM
AL
A
K
H
TX
TZ
N
TT
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
F
FL
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
33.5
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
37.5
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
16
13.5
11
50
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
M32 x 2
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
22
41
14
32 0.039
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
TD
TT
TX
TY
TZ
ZZ
20
62
10
32
32
52
108
118
25
62
10
40
40
60
112
122
32
64
10
40
40
60
114
124
40
88
10
11
53
53
77
143.5
154
1154
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1155
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X

CM2XE Bore size
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke
S + Stroke
H
K
N
G
LP
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
N
G
L RR
U
NA
CX
CD
NA
MM
LH
E
D
CI
A
AL
H1
Stroke
2 x LD
NN
LT
LF
LG
LY
LV
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
CD
CI
CX
20
18
15.5
13
20
25
22
19.5
17
22
32
22
19.5
17
10
40
24
21
22
10
FL
H1
13
10.5
41
13
10.5
45
13
10.5
45
16
13.5
11
50
12
20 0.033
12
10
26 0.033
27
20
12
26 0.033
33
20
14
32 0.039
KA
MM
NA
NN
28
12
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
33.5
5.5
12
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
37.5
5.5
10
15
M10 x 1.25
15
46.5
12
15
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
34.5 M26 x 1.5

M32 x 2
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
RR
62
11.5 115 124
25
62
11.5 119 128
32
12
64
14.5 124 136
40
12
88
14.5 153 165
20
ZZ
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1155
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1156
Series CM2X

(mm)
I-020B, 032B
Y (Max.)
(mm)
I-040B
(Min.)
Bore size (mm)
20
25, 32
40
MM
NDH10
U1
R2
Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
0.1
0.2
14
10
11
66
I-020B
I-032B
I-040B
20
25, 32
40
NX1
18
41
M8 x 1.25
+0.058
0
22
45
M10 x 1.25
+0.058
0
0.1
0.2
14
10
14
69
24
50
M14 x 1.5
12
+0.070
0
16
0.1
0.3
20
14
13
92
A A1 E1 L1
MM
NDH10
NX
R1 U1
46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25 9
+0.058
0
0.1
0.2
48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25 9
+0.058
0
0.1
0.2
10 14
69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12
+0.070
0
16
0.1
0.3
15.5 20
10 14
(mm)
Y (Max.)
ND hole H10
Axis d9
(Min.)
Bore size (mm)
MM
ND
R2
U2
20
25, 32
40
18
41
25
M8 x 1.25
NX2
+0.2
+0.1
10
14
11
66
22
45
25
M10 x 1.25
+0.2
+0.1
10
14
14
69
24
50
49.7 M14 x 1.5
12
16
+0.3
+0.1
13
25
13
92

Y-020B, Y-032B
(mm)
Y-040B
Material: Cast iron
ND hole H10
Axis d9
ND hole H10
Axis d9
Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
A1
E1
L1
MM
ND
NZ
R1
U1
Applicable pin
part number
Y-020B
Y-032B
Y-040B
20
46
16
20
25
36
M8 x 1.25
+0.2
+0.1
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
25, 32
48
18
20
25
38
M10 x 1.25
+0.2
+0.1
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
40
68
22
24
49.7
55
M14 x 1.5
12
16
+0.3
+0.1
38
13
25
CDP-3
3 x 18l
NX
Retaining ring
Cotter pin
size
Bore size: 20, 25, 32

CDP-1
2 x 3
Through hole
Bore size: 40
CDP-3
2 x 3
Through hole
1156
Cotter pin
3 x 18l
Retaining rings (copper pins for 40) are included.
(mm)
CDP-1
Bore size: 40
CDP-2
Bore size: 20, 25, 32
(mm)
Retaining rings (copper pins for 40) are included.
Cotter pin
3 x 18l
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1157
Low Speed Cylinder

Rod End Nut
(mm)
Series CM2X
Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2XE)
(mm)
LC hole
Axis
Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
NT-02
NT-03
NT-04
20
25, 32
40
13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25
17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25
22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5
8
2 x LD
Mounting Nut
(mm)
bore
Part no. Applicable
size (mm)
CM-E020B
CM-E032B
20, 25
32, 40
part no.
24.5
6.8
22
15
30
30
10
3.2
12
59 18.4
CD-S02
34
10
25
15
40
40
13
20
75
CD-S03
Clevis Pin (For CM2XE)

20
SN-020B
SN-032B 25, 32
40
SN-040B
26
30
25.5 M20 x 1.5
32
37
31.5 M26 x 1.5
(mm)
Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
28
Note 1) Clevis bracket pins and retaining rings are included.

41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10
Trunnion Nut
(mm)
Applicable
retaining ring
part no.
Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
Dd9
CD-S02
CD-S03
20, 25
32, 40
8 0.040
0.076
7.6
24.5
19.5
1.6
0.9
Type C 8 for axis
10 0.040
0.076
9.6
34
29
1.35
1.15
Type C 10 for axis
Part no.
Note) Retaining rings are included.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
20
TN-020B
TN-032B 25, 32
40
TN-040B
26
28 25.5 M20 x 1.5
10
32
34 31.5 M26 x 1.5
10
41
45 40.5 M32 x 2
10
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1157
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1158
Series CM2X
Reed auto switch
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
16.5
16.5
Auto switch
22
(24.5)
22
( ): For D-A93 type
D-C7/C8
D-H7/H7W/H7NF
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
D-B5/B6/B59W
D-G5NTL
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
D-G39A/K39A
D-A33A/A34A
Hs

6.8 to 9.6)
Hs
Auto switch
D-A44A
Auto switch

6.8 to 11.5)
D-C73C/C80C
1158
Auto switch
D-H7C
Hs
Hs

6.8 to 9.6)
Auto switch
Hs
Auto switch
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1159
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X
(mm)
Auto switch
model
D-M9
D-M9W
D-A9
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
D-C7
D-C80
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7W
D-H7NF
D-G5NTL
6.5
5.5
10.5
9.5
0.5
2.5
1.5
6.5
5.5
10.5
9.5
0.5
2.5
1.5
7.5
6.5
11.5
10.5
1.5
0.5
3.5
2.5
13.5
11.5
17.5
15.5
13
12
10
6.5
5.5
12
11
8.5
7.5

Auto switch
model
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
D-H7C
(mm)
D-C7
D-C80
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7NF
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
22
25.5
22.5
25
60
69.5
24.5
28
25
27.5
62.5
72
28
31.5
28.5
31
66
75.5
32
35.5
32.5
35
70
79.5
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1159
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1160
Series CM2X

Auto switch model
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Same surface
Different surfaces
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
10
15 Note)
45
D-C7
D-C80
10
15
50
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7NF
10
15
60
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-H7C
10
15
65
D-B5/B64
D-G5NTL
10
15
75
D-B59W
15
20
75
D-A3A/G39A
D-K39A/A44A
10
35
100
Note)
Different surfaces
Same surface
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
45 + 45 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
50 + 45 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
60 + 45 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
65 + 50 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
75 + 55 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
75 + 55(n-2)
35 + 30(n-2)
100 + 100 (n-2)
15 + 45
15 + 45
15 + 45
15 + 50
15 + 50
20 + 50
Note) When 2 D-A93/M9/M9W auto switches are included.

Same surface
Different surfaces
A
A6
15
Auto switch model
Auto switch
6
D-M9
D-M9W
B6

switch holder edge.

Less than 50 strokes
D-A93
D-M9
D-M9W
Operating Range
(mm)
Auto switch model
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
3.5
3.5
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B64
D-A3A/A44A
12
12
13
13
4.5
8.5
10
D-B59W
D-H7/H7W
D-G5NTL/H7NF
D-H7C
D-G39A/K39A
1160

approximately 30% dispersion)
There may be the case it will vary
substantially depending on an ambient
environment.
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1161
Low Speed Cylinder

Series CM2X
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
20
25
32
40
Note)
qBM2-020
wBJ3-1
Note)
qBM2-025
wBJ3-1
Note)
qBM2-032
wBJ3-1
Note)
qBM2-040
wBJ3-1
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7NF
BM2-020
BM2-025
BM2-032
BM2-040
D-B5/B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
D-G5NBL
BA2-020
BA2-025
BA2-032
BA2-040
D-A3A/A44A
D-G39A/K39A
BM3-020
BM3-025
BM3-032
BM3-040
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
Note) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are used as a set.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
Auto switch
c
Set screw (not used)
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
b
q BM2-: A set of a and b in the figures.

w BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e in the figures.
a
REA
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in How to Order, the following auto switches can be mounted.
For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1719 to 1827.
Auto switch type
Reed
Model
D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW

D-G5NTL
REC
Features
D-C80
D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B
Solid state
Electrical entry (Direction)
D-B53, C73, C76
REB
CY

Grommet (In-line)
CX

With timer
MQ
With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1784 to 1785.
Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1746.
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1161
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Series 10-,
Page 1162
11-CQSX, CQ2X
Clean Series Low Speed Cylinder Series 10-, 11The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room graded Class 100 by making an actuators rod
section a double seal construction and discharging by relief port directly to the outside of clean room.
Since the external dimensions and applicable auto switches are the same as standard type, refer to the
separate catalog of Pneumatic Clean Series.
Series 10-, 11-CQSX
Series 10-, 11-CQ2X
How to Order
How to Order
Clean Series
10
11
Clean Series
10
11
Relief type
Vacuum type
10 C(D)QSX B 20 30 D
M9BW
Relief type
Vacuum type
10 C(D)Q2XB 40
With auto switch
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
(Built-in magnet)
Low speed cylinder
Low speed cylinder
Through-hole/Both ends
tapped common (Standard)
Nil
S
n
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
25 mm
12, 16
20
25
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Auto switch

Bore size
(mm)
Nil
Standard stroke
(mm)
Manufacturing of Intermediate stroke

Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval
are available by using spacers with
standard stroke cylinders. The overall
length of cylinder will be the same as the
standard stroke with a longer one.
Example) 3 mm width spacer is installed in
the standard cylinder 10CQSXB25-50D to make 10CQSXB25-47D.
Without auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
For the applicable auto
switch model, refer to

page 1129.
Auto switches are
shipped together, (but not
assembled).
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30

5, 10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40, 45, 50
Fluid
Proof pressure
Piston speed
Piston rod size
Rod end thread
Female thread
Male thread
Stroke tolerance
Port size
Vacuum port, Relief port
Bore size
(mm)
Fluid
Proof pressure
Piston speed
Piston rod size
Rod end thread
Female thread
Male thread
Stroke tolerance
Port size
1162
Nil
Nil
M
Standard (Rod end female thread)

Rod end male thread
Rc
NPT
G
TN
TF
D Double acting
32 to 100

Action
Standard stroke
32, 40
25
0.04 MPa
0.035 MPa
Without auto switch: 10 to 70C
With auto switch: 10 to 60C
1 to 200 mm/s
6
8
10
12
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0.7
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1.0
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
+1.0
0 mm
M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8
11- (Vacuum type)

16
20
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Without auto switch, 32, 5 strokes:

M thread
Bore size
(mm)
Action
10- (Relief type)

16
20
S
n
D Double acting
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
12
Number of
auto switches
Port thread type

Nil
50, 63
12
32 mm
40 mm
50 mm
63 mm
Rod end thread
Specifications
Bore size
(mm)
32
40
50
63
Number of
auto switches
Bore size
12
16
20
25
J79W
Bore size
Mounting style
B
30 D
25
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.03 MPa
0.025 MPa
1 to 200 mm/s
0.5 to 200 mm/s
6
8
10
12
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0.7
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1.0
M5 x 0.8
M6 x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
+1.0
0 mm
M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8
Auto switch
Standard stroke
(mm)
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35,
40, 45, 50, 75, 100
Manufacturing of Intermediate stroke

Intermediate strokes by the 1 mm interval
are available by using spacers with
standard stroke cylinders. But, as for 40
with damper, please consult SMC
separately.
Example) 18 mm width spacer is installed
in the standard cylinder 10CQ2XB40-75D to make 10CQ2XB40-57D.
Nil
Without auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
For the applicable auto
switch model, refer to

page 1136.
Auto switches are
shipped together, (but
not assembled).
Rod end thread

Nil
M
Standard (Rod end female thread)

Rod end male thread
Specifications
Bore size
(mm)
32
10- (Relief type)

40
50
63
32
11- (Vacuum type)

40
50
63
Fluid
Proof pressure
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.035 MPa
0.03 MPa
0.025 MPa
0.02 MPa
Piston speed
1 to 200 mm/s
0.5 to 200 mm/s
Piston rod size
16
20
16
20
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.5
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.5
Female thread
Rod end thread
M14 x 1.5
M18 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5
M18 x 1.5
Male thread
+1.0
Stroke tolerance
0 mm
Port size
M5 x 0.8, 1/8 Note 1)
M5 x 0.8, 1/8 Note 1)
1/4
1/4
M5 x 0.8
Note 1) Only 5 stroke comes with M5 x 0.8 in the case of no auto switch on 32.
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1163
Microspeed Cylinder
for Clean Room
Series 10-,
11-CM2X
10-,11- CM2X Series

How to Order
Clean Series
10
11
Mounting style
Relief type
Vacuum type
10 C(D)M2X L 40
Basic style
B
Axial foot style
L
150 M9BW
With auto switch
FZ
(Built-in magnet)
Boss-cut rod style

Flange style
Low speed cylinder

Number of
auto switches
Bore size
20
25
32
40
20 mm
25 mm
32 mm
40 mm
Port thread type

Nil
Rc
TN
TF
NPT
Nil
S
n
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Auto switch
Nil
Standard Stroke
Clean series
10(Relief type)
11(Vacuum type)
Without auto switch

(Built-in magnet)
For the applicable

auto switch model,
refer to page 1148.
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300

Refer to Standard Stroke below.
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Specifications
Bore size
(mm)
20
10- (Relief type)

25
32
Fluid
Proof pressure
11- (Vacuum type)

25
32
20
40
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
0.035 MPa
0.025 MPa
Rubber bumper

Cushion
Piston speed
Piston rod size
Rod end thread
Stroke tolerance
Port size
Vacuum port, Refief port
40
8
M8 x 1.25
1 to 200 mm/s
10
12
M10 x 1.25
1/8
14
M14 x 1.5
8
M8 x 1.25
+1.4
0 mm
1/4
0.5 to 200 mm/s

10
12
M10 x 1.25
1/8
REA
14
M14 x 1.5
REB
1/4
REC
M5 x 0.8
CY
Precautions
CX

Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions.
Refer to the Clean Series catalog separately for the precautions in clean environments.
MQ
RHC
RZQ
Warning
When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe fitting into the port, the
coupling portion of the cover could break if the cover rotated.
Caution
Maintenance
Caution
D-
1. Grease pack
When maintenance requires only grease, use the following part
number to order.
Grease pack part no.: GR-X-005 (5 g)
-X
Individual
-X
1. Be careful of the snap ring to pop out.

When replacing the rod seal, take care that the snap ring does not
spring out while you are removing it.
1163
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1164
Related Products:
Made to Order Specifications:
-XB13: Low Speed Cylinder

5 to 50 mm/s (CY1/CY3: 7 to 50 mm/s)
Symbol
Low Speed Cylinder
-X B13
CG1
Standard model no.
XB13
CY1
CY3
Standard model no.
XB13
MB
Standard model no.
XB13
MGPM
L
Standard model no.
XB13
MGGM
Standard model no.
XB13
MGCM
Standard model no.
XB13
CX2
Standard model no.
XB13
CXW M
L
Standard model no.
XB13
CXS M
L
Standard model no.
XB13
MXH
MXU
Standard model no.
XB13
CXT M
L
CXSJ M
L
Standard model no.
XB13
Low speed cylinder
Low speed cylinder
Note) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator.
Specifications
Applicable
cylinder
Series
Action
Bore size (mm)

Piston speed
Cushion
Air cylinder
Standard
CG1
MB
Magnetically
Compact
coupled
guide
rodless
cylinder
cylinder
1
CY 3
M
MGP L
Guide
cylinder
32, 40
50, 63
80, 100
5 to 50 mm/s
Rubber
bumper
Air
cushion
on
both ends
Mounting
Platform
cylinder
MXH
MXU
CXTL
6, 10
16, 20
6, 10
16
12, 16
20, 25
32, 40
Double acting
CY3B: 6, 10,
15, 20, 25, 32
40, 50, 63
CY1S,
CY1L: 6 to 40
7 to 50
mm/s
12, 16, 20
25, 32, 40
50, 63, 80
100
5 to 50
mm/s
Rubber bumper
20, 25, 32
40, 50, 63
80, 100
20, 25
32, 40
50
10, 15
25
10, 16
20, 25
32
6, 10
15, 20
25, 32
6, 10
15, 20
25, 32
5 to 50 mm/s
Rubber bumper
(Basic cylinder)
Shock
absorber
(CX2: Option)
Rubber
bumper
Mountable
Basic
Slider
Basic
Basic
Front mounting
Flange
Dimensions
Dimensions and specifications are the same as standard products of double acting.
Additional
specifications
No shock absorber is available for the Series MGGM.
1164
CXW L CXSJL CXSL
MGGM MGCM CX2
Auto switch
Basic
Basic
Foot
Foot
Flange
Flange
Trunnion Clevis
Clevis Trunnion
Compact slide
Slide bearing

20, 25, 32
40, 50, 63
80, 100
Dual rod cylinder
Slide unit
Basic
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1165
Related Products:
Speed Controller for Low Speed Operation

The effective area of controlled flow is approximately 1/10 of the standard type.
These controllers are suitable for controlling the speed of microspeed cylinders.
The dual type speed controller is especially suitable for cylinders with a small bore size.
Elbow/Universal Type
Air Flow/Effective Area
AS121FM-M5
AS131FM-M5
Model
1/8", 5/32", 3/16"

1/4"
Inch size
AS221FM-02
AS231FM-02
6, 8
3.2, 4
3.2, 4, 6
Metric size
Tubing
O.D.
AS221FM-01
AS231FM-01
1/8", 5/32"
8, 10
3/16", 1/4"
5/16"
1/4", 5/16"
3/8"
5/32" 3/16"
Controlled Air flow (l/min (ANR))

flow
Effective area (mm2)
12
38
0.1
0.2
0.6
Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
100
180
230
260
390
460
1.5
2.7
3.5
Free flow
Note) Supply pressure: 0.5 MPa, Temperature: 20C
In-line Type
Tubing
O.D.
AS2001FM
AS1001FM
Model
3.2, 4, 6
Metric size
1/8", 5/32", 3/16"

1/4"
Inch size
5/32"
AS2051FM
3/16", 1/4"
3/16"
4
12
8
1/4", 5/16"
38
Controlled Air flow (l/min (ANR))

flow
0.1
100
130
230
290
460
1.5
3.5
4.5
Free flow
0.2
0.6
Elbow Type (Metal body)

AS120M
Model
Cylinder side
Port size
Controlled flow
Free flow
Tube side
Air flow (l/min (ANR))
M5 x 0.8 10-32 UNF
AS220M-01
AS220M-02
R 1/8
R 1/4
NPT 1/8
Rc 1/8
NPT 1/4
Rc 1/4
12
38
0.1
0.2
0.6
105
280
420
1.6
4.3
6.5
REA
REB
Dual Type
REC
Tubing O.D.
Model
ASD230FM-M5
Metric size
4, 6
1/8", 5/32"
3/16", 1/4"
Inch size
Controlled flow Air flow (l/min (ANR))

(Free flow)
ASD330FM-01
6, 8
3/16", 1/4"
CY
ASD430FM-02
6
8, 10
CX
1/4", 5/16"
3/8"
12
38
MQ
0.1
0.2
0.6
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1165
P1111-P1166-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:25 PM
Page 1166
Low Speed Cylinder

Specific Product Precautions
Refer to front matters 42 and 43 for Safety Instructions and pages 3 to 11 for Actuator
and Auto Switch Precautions.
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit
Warning
Horizontal Operation
1
11
Dual speed controller
Meter-in speed controller
Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the

meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip. More stable low speed
operation can be achieved than meter-in circuit alone.
Meter-in speed controllers can reduce lurching while controlling

the speed. The two adjustment needles facilitate adjustment.
Vertical Operation
1
11
A
a
P1
P2
(c)
(b)
P0
P0
a
A
(1) Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently

the meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip.
(2) Depending on the size of the load, installing a regulator with
check valve at position (b) can deduce lurching during
descent and operation delay during ascent.
As a guide,
when W + P0a>P0A,
adjust P1 to make W + P1a = P0A.

(2) Installing a regulator with check valve at position (c) can
reduce lurching during descent and operation delay during
ascent.
As a guide,
adjust P2 to make W + P2A = P0a.
W: Load (N) P0: Operating pressure (MPa) P1, P2: Reduced pressure (MPa) a: Rod side piston area (mm2) A: Head side piston area (mm2)
Warning
Since CJ2X, CUX10 are subject to internal leakage due to their construction, the speed may not be fully controlled with the meter-out controller
() during low speed operation.
Selection
Caution
1. Operate within the standard strokes.
Operating with the stroke exceeding the standard stroke may
cause malfunction.
2. Provide a construction that does not apply a lateral

load to the cylinder.
Applying a lateral load to the cylinder may cause malfunction.
3. Do not use the product at a high frequency.

Use it at 30 cpm or less as a guideline.
4. Do not wipe out the grease in the sliding part of the

air cylinder.
Doing so forcefully may cause malfunction.
1166
Pneumatic Circuit
Caution
1. The piping length between the speed controller and
the cylinder port must be kept as short as possible.
If the speed controller and the cylinder port are far apart,
speed adjustment may be unstable.
2. Use a low speed controller to easily adjust for low

speed operation or a dual speed controller (Series
ASD) to prevent cylinders from popping out.
(When the low speed controller is used, the maximum speed
may be limited.)
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1069
Smooth Cylinder
Series CM2Y
20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
CM2Y L 40
With auto switch
150
150 M9BW
CDM2Y L 40
Made to Order
With auto switch
For details, refer to page

1070.
(Built-in magnet)
Number of auto switches
Mounting style
Basic style
B
Axial foot style
L
F
G
Single clevis style
C
Double clevis style
D
U
T
E
BZ
FZ Boss-cut rod side flange style
UZ Boss-cut rod side trunnion style
Bore size
20
25
32
40
20 mm
25 mm
Nil
2 pcs.
S
n
n pcs.
1 pc.
Auto switch
32 mm
Nil
40 mm
Thread type
Nil
Rc
TN
TF
NPT
Refer to "Standard Stroke"

on page 1070.
Without auto switch

model, refer to the table below.

(Example) CDM2YB20-100
Type
Special function
Electrical
entry
Solid state switch
Grommet
Indicator light
Wiring
(Output)
3-wire (NPN)
3-wire (PNP)
Load voltage
DC
Lead wire (m)

Pre-wired
0.5 1 3 5 None connector
(Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Applicable
load
M9N
M9P
M9B
H7C
G39A
K39A
M9NW
M9PW
M9BW
H7NF

A96
IC circuit
100 V
100 V or less
100 V, 200 V
200 V or less
24 V or less
A93
A90
B54
B64
C73C
C80C
A33A
A34A
A44A
B59W

IC circuit
5 V, 12 V
12 V
2-wire
Connector
5 V, 12 V
3-wire (NPN)
Terminal
24 V
conduit Yes
12 V
2-wire
3-wire (NPN)
Diagnostic
5 V, 12 V
indication
3-wire (PNP)
Grommet
(2-color)
12 V
2-wire
5 V, 12 V
4-wire (NPN)
With diagnostic output (2-color)
3-wire
5V
Yes (Equiv. NPN)
Grommet
AC
Auto switch
model
IC circuit
REA
IC circuit Relay,
PLC
REB
IC circuit
REC
IC circuit
CY
CX
MQ
Reed switch
No
Yes
Relay,
PLC
No
12 V
Yes
Connector
2-wire
24 V
IC circuit
No
PLC
Terminal
conduit
100 V, 200 V
Yes
Relay,
DIN terminal
PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color) Grommet

Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m Nil (Example) M9NW : Manufactured upon receipt of order.
1 m M (Example) M9NWM D-A9V/M9V/M9WV/M9A(V)L types cannot be mounted.
3 m L (Example) M9NWL Do not add the suffix (N) indicating no lead wire to the part numbers of models D-A3A,
5 m Z (Example) M9NWZ A44A, G39A and K39A.
Individual
In addition to the models in the above table, there are some other auto switches that are applicable. For more information, refer to page 1082.
-X
Refer to pages 1784 and 1785 for details of auto switches with a pre-wired connector.
D-A9/M9/M9W auto switches are shipped together (not assembled). (Only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipped.)
D-C7/C80/H7 auto switches are assembled at the time of shipment.
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
1069
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1070
Series CM2Y
Specifications
JIS Symbol
Integral clevis
Double acting: Single rod
20
Bore size (mm)

Action
Piston speed
Fluid
Proof pressure
Ambient and fluid
temperature
Lubrication
Cushion
Allowable leakage rate
25
32
40

5 to 500 mm/s
Air
1.05 MPa
0.7 MPa
Without auto switch 10 to 70C (with no freezing)
With auto switch 10 to 60C (with no freezing)
Non-lube
+1.4
0 mm
Rubber bumper
0.5 l/min (ANR) or less
Minimum Operating Pressure

Unit: MPa
Made to Order
20
Bore size (mm)

25
32
40
0.02
(For details, refer to pages 1836, 1851 to 1954.)

Symbol
Specifications
XC3
Made of stainless steel
XC6
Adjustable stroke cylinder/adjustable retraction type
XC9
XC13 Auto switch rail mounting style
XA
Precautions
Precautions.
Handling Precautions
Warning
1. Do not rotate the cover
When installing a cylinder or screwing a fitting into
the port, the coupling portion of the cover may be
damaged if the cover rotates.
Caution
1. Be careful of the retaining ring to pop out.
When replacing the rod seal, be careful of the
retaining ring not to pop out while removing it.
Replacement Part: Rod Seal

Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
Part no.
PDU-8Z
PDU-10Z
PDU-12LZ
PDU-14LZ
Mounting bracket
Axial foot
Bore size (mm)

Description (when ordering
Minimum
a minimum number)
20
25 32
40
order
2
CM-L020B CM-L032B CM-L040B Foot 2 pcs., Mounting nut 1 pc.
Flange
CM-F020B
Single clevis
CM-C020B CM-C032B CM-C040B Single clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.
Double clevis (with pin) ,
CM-D020B CM-D032B CM-D040B
Trunnion (with nut)
CM-T020B
CM-F032B
CM-T032B
CM-F040B Flange 1 pc., Mounting nut 1 pc.
CM-T040B
Double clevis 1 pc., Liner 3 pcs.,

Clevis pin 1 pc., Retaining ring 2 pcs.
Trunnion 1 pc.,
Trunnion nut 1 pc.
When ordering foot brackets, order 2 pieces per cylinder unit.

Three liners are included in the clevis bracket for adjusting an angle when mounting it.
Clevis pins and retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are included.
Mounting Bracket and Accessory

Standard
Accessory
Mounting
Option
Note 3)
Mounting
nut
Rod end
nut
Clevis
pin
Single Double
knuckle knuckle
joint
joint
Note 4)
Clevis
bracket
Basic style
(1 pc.)
Axial foot style
(2)
(1)
(1)
Note 1)
Single clevis style
Note 1)
Double clevis style Note 3)
Note 1)
Note 5)
(1)Note 2)
(1)Note 2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Note 1) Mounting nuts are not attached to the integral clevis, single clevis and double clevis types.
Note 2) Trunnion nuts are mounted on the rod side trunnion style and head side trunnion style.
Note 3) Pins and retaining rings (cotter pins in case of 40) are packed with the double clevis
and double knuckle joint styles.
Note 4) Pins and retaining rings are packed with clevis brackets.
Note 5) Retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are included in clevis pins.
Standard Stroke
Grease Pack for Maintenance

Bore size (mm)
When only grease for maintenance is necessary,
please order by the following part numbers.
Grease pack part no.: GR-L-005 (5 g)
GR-L-010 (10 g)
GR-L-150 (150 g)
1070
20, 25, 32, 40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Note 2) As the stroke increases, more sliding resistance may result due to the
deflection of the piston rod and other factors. Take measures such as the
installation of a guide.
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1071
Smooth Cylinder
Mass
Series CM2Y
(kg)
20
25
32
40
Basic style
0.14
0.21
0.28
0.56
Axial foot style
0.29
0.37
0.44
0.83
Flange style
0.20
0.30
0.37
0.68
0.12
0.19
0.27
0.52
Single clevis style
0.18
0.25
0.32
0.65
Double clevis style
0.19
0.27
0.33
0.69
Trunnion style
0.18
0.28
0.34
0.66
0.13
0.19
0.26
0.53
0.19
0.28
0.35
0.65
0.17
0.26
0.32
0.63
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.13
0.07
0.07
0.14
0.14
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.23
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.20
Bore size (mm)
Basic
mass

Option
bracket
Calculation: (Example) CM2YL32-100

Additional mass0.08/50 stroke
0.44 + 0.08 x 100/50 = 0.60 kg
Low Friction Cylinder Mounting

CM2Y
Mounting style
Bore size
Stroke
X1854
Same mounting specification as CM2Q
In order to adjust the mounting dimensions of the low friction cylinder (CM2Q), extend the longitudinal dimension (S, ZZ) by 3 mm.
Specifications
Cylinder bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
Action
Dual directions
Direction of low friction
Air
Fluid
Proof pressure
1.05 MPa
0.7 MPa
REA
REB
Low friction operates in dual directions.
REC
Dimensions
CY
CX
MQ
S + Stroke
RHC
ZZ + Stroke
Bore size (mm)
ZZ
20
65
119
25
65
123
32
67
125
40
91
157
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
Add 3 mm to S and ZZ dimensions of the double acting, single rod type on pages 1072 to 1076 for the dimensions for each mounting bracket other than the basic style.
1071
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1072
Series CM2Y
Basic Style (B)
CM2YB
Bore size
Stroke
G

2 x NN
MM
AL
A
K
H
1.5
1.5
N
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
NA
2 x Eh8
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)

2 x FL
NA
Boss-cut
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A
AL
B1
B2
FL
H1
H2
KA
MM
NA
NN
M8 x 1.25
15
24
ZZ
M20 x 1.5
62
116
20
18
15.5
13
26
0
200.033
13
10.5
41
28
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
0
260.033
13
10.5
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
62
120
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
0
260.033
13
10.5
45
37.5 5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5 M26 x 1.5
64
122
40
24
21
22
41
14
32
0
0.039
16
13.5
11
50
10
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5 42.5
88
154
Boss-cut
M32 x 2
(mm)
Bore size (mm)

20
ZZ
103
25
107
32
109
40
138

Bore size
H
K
F G
H2
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
G F
A
AL
H1
Stroke
2 x LC
LH
CM2YL
4 x LD
N
LT
MM

S + Stroke
LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
N
X
LX
LZ
(mm)
F FL G
H H1 H2
MM
N NA
NN
Z ZZ
20
18 15.5 40 13 26 8 13 10.5 8 41 5
8 28 5
4 6.8 25 102 3.2 40 55 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 20 8 21 131
25
22 19.5 47 17 32 10 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 33.5 5.5 8
4 6.8 28 102 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 20 8 25 135
32
22 19.5 47 17 32 12 13 10.5 8 45 6
8 37.5 5.5 10 4 6.8 28 104 3.2 40 55 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 20 8 25 137
40
24 21 54 22 41 14 16 13.5 11 50 8 10 46.5 7 12 4
1072
7 30 134 3.2 55 75 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
88 23 10 27 171
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1073
Smooth Cylinder
Series CM2Y

Stroke
2 x FD
Mounting hole
40
FY
C2
4 x FD
Mounting hole
FX
FZ
20 to 32
H1
H2
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
Eh8
I
Bore size
CM2YF
MM
Width across
flats KA
AL
A

K
Z
H

2 x FL
1.5
FT
N
N
F
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Boss-cut style
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B
20
25
32
40
B1 B2 C2
F FL FD FT FX FY FZ G
H1 H2
K KA
MM
N NA
NN
Z ZZ
0
20 0.033 13 10.5
0
13 10.5
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 10 26 0.033
60 75
41
28
M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 37 116
60 75
45
33.5 5.5
M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 41 120
0
13 10.5
22 19.5 40 17 32 37 12 26 0.033
0
16 13.5
24 21 52 22 41 47.3 14 32 0.039
60 75
45
37.5 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 41 122
66 36 82 11 50
10 46.5
12 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
88 45 154
18 15.5 34 13 26 30
Boss-cut Style
Bore size (mm)
20
ZZ
103
25
107
32
109
40
138
(mm)
REA
REB
REC
CY
CX
MQ
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1073
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1074
Series CM2Y
CM2YG Bore size
Stroke
H2
AL
A
1.5
K
H
MM
4 x FD
Mounting hole
2 x FD
Mounting hole
C2
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
Eh8
D
H1 2 x NN
FY

FX
FZ
N
FT
S + Stroke
40
20 to 32
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
F
FL
FD
FT
FX
FY
FZ
H1
H2
13
10.5
60
75
41
28
13
10.5
60
75
45
33.5
13
10.5
60
75
45
37.5
16
13.5
66
36
82
11
50
10
46.5
ZZ
M20 x 1.5
62
107
116
30
M26 x 1.5
62
111
120
34.5
M26 x 1.5
64
113
122
M32 x 2
88
143
154
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
C2
20
18
15.5
34
13
26
30
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
40
17
32
37
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
52
22
41
47.3
14
32 0.039
Bore size (mm)
KA
MM
NA
NN
20
M8 x 1.25
15
24
25
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
32
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
40
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
(mm)
P

Bore size
Stroke
CDH10
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
Eh8
D
CI
+0.058
0
H1 NN
MM
AL
A
NA
CM2YC
CX 0.1
0.2
1.5
K
H
NA
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
RR
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A
AL B1
FL
H1
0
20 0.033
13 10.5
41
28
CI CD CX
MM
30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 14 133 142
N NA
NN
RR
ZZ
K KA
20
18 15.5 13 24
10
25
22 19.5 17 30
10 10
0
26 0.033
13 10.5
45
33.5 5.5
30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 14 137 146
32
22 19.5 17 30
10 12
0
26 0.033
13 10.5
45
37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 14 139 148
40
24 21 22 38 10 15 14
0
32 0.039
16 13.5 11 50
46.5
1074
12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
11 88 18 177 188
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1075
Smooth Cylinder
Series CM2Y

CM2YD
Bore size
Stroke
CD hole H10

G Axis d9
G 2xP
H1 NN
+0.058
0
CL
0.040
0.076
NA
CI
Eh8
D
(Rc, NPT, G)
MM
AL
A
1.5
CX +0.2
+0.1
CZ
NA
S + Stroke
RR
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) A AL B1 CD CI CL CX CZ D
F FL G
H1
13 10.5 8
41
28
30 M8 x 1.25 15 24 M20 x 1.5
62 14 133 142
13 10.5 8
45
6 33.5 5.5 8
30 M10 x 1.25 15 30 M26 x 1.5
62 14 137 146
13 10.5 8
45
6 37.5 5.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 15 34.5 M26 x 1.5
64 14 139 148
16 13.5 11 50
20
18 15.5 13
24 25 10 19
20 0.033
25
22 19.5 17
30 25 10 19 10
26 0.033
32
22 19.5 17
30 25 10 19 12
26 0.033
40
24 21 22 10 38 41.2 15 30 14
32 0.039
K KA L
5
MM
N NA
NN
P RR S
12 39 M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5 M32 x 2
8 46.5 7
Z ZZ
11 88 18 177 188
Clevis pin and snap ring (cotter pin for bore size 40) are shipped together.

Stroke
0.025
TY
MM
TX
TZ
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
2 x NN
Eh8
I

D
Bore size
TDe9 0.061
CM2YU
AL
A
K
Z
H
TT
2 x FL
1.5
N
F
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
REA
Boss-cut style
REB
REC
CY
ZZ + Stroke
Bore size (mm)

20
25
32
40
A
18
22
22
24
AL
15.5
19.5
19.5
21
B1
13
17
17
22
B2
26
32
32
41
D
8
10
12
14
0
20 0.033
0
26 0.033
0
26 0.033
0
32 0.039
Bore size (mm)

20
25
32
40
S
62
62
64
88
TD
8
9
9
10
TT
10
10
10
11
TX
32
40
40
53
TY
32
40
40
53
TZ
52
60
60
77
F
13
13
13
16
Z
36
40
40
44.5
FL
10.5
10.5
10.5
13.5
(mm)
ZZ
116
120
122
154
G
8
8
8
11
H
41
45
45
50
I
28
33.5
37.5
46.5
H1
5
6
6
8
K
5
5.5
5.5
7
KA
6
8
10
12
MM
M8 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M14 x 1.5
N
15
15
15
21.5
NA
24
30
34.5
42.5
NN
M20 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M26 x 1.5
M32 x 2
(mm)
P
MQ
RHC
RZQ
Boss-cut Style
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
CX
(mm)
ZZ
103
107
109
138
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1075
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1076
Series CM2Y
Stroke
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
1.5
Eh8
D
TY
H1
2 x NN
0.025
Bore size
TDe9 0.061
CM2YT
MM
AL
A
K
H
TX
TZ
N
TT
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
F
FL
H1
KA
MM
NA
NN
13
10.5
41
28
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
33.5
5.5
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
13
10.5
45
37.5
5.5
10
M10 x 1.25
15
34.5
M26 x 1.5
16
13.5
11
50
46.5
12
M14 x 1.5
21.5
42.5
M32 x 2
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
B2
20
18
15.5
13
26
20 0.033
25
22
19.5
17
32
10
26 0.033
32
22
19.5
17
32
12
26 0.033
40
24
21
22
41
14
32 0.039
Bore size (mm)
TD
TT
TX
TY
TZ
ZZ
20
62
10
32
32
52
108
118
25
62
10
40
40
60
112
122
32
64
10
40
40
60
114
124
40
88
10
11
53
53
77
143.5
154
(mm)

Bore size
H
K
LZ + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Z + Stroke
S + Stroke
N
G
LP
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
1.5
N
G
L RR
U
NA
0
CX 0.1
+0.058
0
CDH10
MM
2 x LD
NN
LF
LT

LH
CI
Eh8
D
A
AL
H1
Stroke
NA
CM2YE
LG
LY
LV
(mm)
Bore size (mm)
AL
B1
CD
CI
CX
FL
H1
20
18
15.5
13
20
12
0
20 0.033
13
10.5
41
25
22
19.5
17
22
12
10
0
26 0.033
13
10.5
45
32
22
19.5
17
10
27
20
12
0
26 0.033
13
10.5
45
40
24
21
22
10
33
20
14
0
32 0.039
16
13.5
11
50
Bore size (mm)
RR
62
11.5 115 124
25
62
11.5 119 128
32
12
64
14.5 124 136
40
12
88
14.5 153 165
(mm)
20
1076
ZZ
KA
MM
NA
NN
28
12
M8 x 1.25
15
24
M20 x 1.5
33.5
5.5
12
M10 x 1.25
15
30
M26 x 1.5
37.5
5.5
10
15
M10 x 1.25
15
46.5
12
15
M14 x 1.5 21.5 42.5
34.5 M26 x 1.5

M32 x 2
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1077
Series CM2Y

NDH10
(mm)
I-020B, 032B
Y (Max.)
MM
(mm)
I-040B
R R1
NDH10
MM
U1
H
Z (Min.)
R2
Bore size
20
25, 32
40
MM
A1
NDH10
18
41
M8 x 1.25
+0.058
0
22
45
M10 x 1.25
+0.058
0
24
50
M14 x 1.5
12
+0.070
0
U1
R2
Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
14
10
11
66
0.1
0.2
14
10
14
69
16 0.1
0.3
20
14
13
92
I-020B
I-032B
I-040B
20
25, 32
40
U1
L1
A
A A1 E1 L1
MM
NX
NDH10
NX
R1 U1
46 16 20 36 M8 x 1.25
+0.058
0
0.1
0.2
48 18 20 38 M10 x 1.25
+0.058
0
0.1
0.2
10 14
0.1
0.3
15.5 20
16
69 22 24 55 M14 x 1.5 12 +0.070
0
10 14
(mm)
Y (Max.)
MM
NX2
L
L1
A
A1
U1
0.1
0.2
NX1

ND hole H10
Axis d9
NDH10
E1
NX
NX1
RR
E1
MM
45
A
U2
H
Z (Min.)
R2
Bore size
MM
ND
R2
U2
20
25, 32
40
18
41
25
M8 x 1.25
NX2
+0.2
+0.1
10
14
11
66
22
45
25
M10 x 1.25
+0.2
+0.1
10
14
14
69
24
50
49.7 M14 x 1.5
12
16
+0.3
+0.1
13
25
13
92

Y-020B, Y-032B
(mm)
Y-040B
1
RR
RR
MM
A1
REB
E1
NX
NZ
L
E1
ND hole H10
Axis d9
REA
ND hole H10
Axis d9
NX
NZ
L
MM
Material: Cast iron
U1
A1
L1
A
L1
A
REC
U1
CY
Part no.
Applicable bore
size
A1
E1
L1
MM
ND
Y-020B
Y-032B
Y-040B
20
46
16
20
25
36
M8 x 1.25
NZ
R1
U1
Applicable pin
part number
+0.2
+0.1
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
+0.2
+0.1
18
14
CDP-1
Type C 9 for axis
38
13
25
CDP-3
3 x 18l
NX
25, 32
48
18
20
25
38
M10 x 1.25
40
68
22
24
49.7
55
M14 x 1.5
12
16 +0.3
+0.1
Retaining ring
Cotter pin
size
CX
MQ
Bore size: 20, 25, 32

CDP-1
2 x 3
Through hole
RZQ
Bore size: 40
CDP-3
D-
2 x 3
Through hole
-X
Cotter pin
3 x 18l
Retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are included.
(mm)
CDP-1
Bore size: 40
CDP-2
RHC
Bore size: 20, 25, 32
(mm)
Individual
-X
Cotter pin
3 x 18l
Retaining rings (cotter pins for 40) are included.
1077
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1078
Series CM2Y
Rod End Nut
(mm)
Clevis Pivot Bracket (For CM2E)
(mm)
RLR
Axis 0.040
0.076
20
25, 32
40
13 15.0 12.5 M8 x 1.25
17 19.6 16.5 M10 x 1.25
22 25.4 21.0 M14 x 1.5
Mounting Nut
(mm)
H
Applicable bore
size (mm)
20
SN-020B
SN-032B 25, 32
40
SN-040B
bore
Part no. Applicable
size (mm)
CM-E020B
CM-E032B
20, 25
32, 40
LG
2 x LD
LY
part no.
24.5
6.8
22
15
30
30
10
3.2
12
59 18.4
CD-S02
34
10
25
15
40
40
13
20
75
CD-S03
Clevis Pin (For CM2E)
26
30
25.5 M20 x 1.5
32
37
31.5 M26 x 1.5
(mm)
41 47.3 40.5 M32 x 2.0 10
Trunnion Nut
(mm)
C
D
Part no.
20
TN-020B
TN-032B 25, 32
40
TN-040B
1078
26
28 25.5 M20 x 1.5
10
32
34 31.5 M26 x 1.5
10
41
45 40.5 M32 x 2
10
Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm)
Dd9
CD-S02
CD-S03
20, 25
32, 40
8 0.040
0.076
7.6
24.5
19.5
1.6
0.9
Type C 8 for axis
10 0.040
0.076
9.6
34
29
1.35
1.15
Type C 10 for axis
Note) Retaining rings are included.
l
L
Applicable bore
size (mm)
28
Note 1) Clevis bracket pins and retaining rings are included.

LF
LE
NT-02
NT-03
NT-04
LT
LH
Applicable bore
size (mm)
Part no.
+0.15
LC hole +0.05
Dd9
H
Part no.
L
LV
LX
Applicable retaining
ring part no.
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1079
Smooth Cylinder
Series CM2Y
Reed auto switch
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
16.5
16.5
Auto switch
22
(24.5)
22
( ): For D-A93 type
D-C7/C8
D-H7/H7W/H7NF
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
D-B5/B6/B59W
D-G5NTL
Hs
Hs
Auto switch
Auto switch
D-G39A/K39A
D-A33A/A34A
Hs

6.8 to 9.6)
Hs
Auto switch

6.8 to 9.6)
Auto switch
REA
D-A44A
D-H7C
Auto switch
Hs
REB
Hs
Auto switch
REC
CY

6.8 to 11.5)
CX
MQ
D-C73C/C80C
Hs
RHC
Auto switch
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1079
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1080
Series CM2Y
(mm)
Auto switch
model
D-M9
D-M9W
D-A9
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
D-C7
D-C80
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
20
25
32
40
1080
D-G5NTL
5.5
10.5
9.5
0.5
2.5
1.5
6.5
5.5
10.5
9.5
0.5
2.5
1.5
7.5
6.5
11.5
10.5
1.5
0.5
3.5
2.5
13.5
11.5
17.5
15.5
13
12
10
6.5
5.5
12
11
8.5
7.5
Bore size
(mm)
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7W
D-H7NF
6.5
Auto switch
model
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
D-B5
D-B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
D-H7C
(mm)
D-C7
D-C80
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7NF
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-A3A
D-G39A
D-K39A
D-A44A
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
Hs
22
25.5
22.5
25
60
69.5
24.5
28
25
27.5
62.5
72
28
31.5
28.5
31
66
75.5
32
35.5
32.5
35
70
79.5
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1081
Smooth Cylinder
Series CM2Y


Auto switch model
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Same surface
Different surfaces
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
10
15 Note)
45
D-C7
D-C80
10
15
50
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7NF
10
15
60
D-C73C
D-C80C
D-H7C
10
15
65
D-B5/B64
D-G5NTL
10
15
75
D-B59W
15
20
75
D-A3A/G39A
D-K39A/A44A
10
35
100
Note)
Different surfaces
Same surface
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
45 + 45 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
50 + 45 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
60 + 45 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
65 + 50 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
75 + 55 (n-2)
(n-2)
2
(n = 2, 4, 6)
75 + 55(n-2)
35 + 30(n-2)
100 + 100 (n-2)
15 + 45
15 + 45
15 + 45
15 + 50
15 + 50
20 + 50
Note) When 2 D-A93/M9/M9W auto switches are included.

Different surfaces
Same surface
A
A6
15
Auto switch model
Auto switch
6
D-M9
D-M9W
B6
REA

switch holder edge.

REB
REC
D-A93
D-M9
D-M9W
CY
CX
Operating Range
Auto switch model
(mm)
MQ
RHC
Bore size (mm)
20
25
32
40
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
3.5
3.5
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B64
D-A3A/A44A
12
12
13
13
4.5
8.5
10
D-B59W
D-H7/H7W
D-G5NTL/H7NF
D-H7C
D-G39A/K39A
RZQ
D-
-X

approximately 30% dispersion)
There may be the case it will vary
substantially depending on an ambient
environment.
Individual
-X
1081
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:21 PM
Page 1082
Series CM2Y
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
20
25
32
40
Note)
qBM2-020
wBJ3-1
Note)
qBM2-025
wBJ3-1
Note)
qBM2-032
wBJ3-1
Note)
qBM2-040
wBJ3-1
D-C7/C80
D-C73C/C80C
D-H7
D-H7W
D-H7NF
BM2-020
BM2-025
BM2-032
BM2-040
D-B5/B64
D-B59W
D-G5NTL
BA2-020
BA2-025
BA2-032
BA2-040
D-A3A/A44A
D-G39A/K39A
BM3-020
BM3-025
BM3-032
BM3-040
D-A9
D-M9
D-M9W
Note) Two kinds of auto switch mounting brackets are used as a set.
e
Switch spacer
(Stainless steel)
d
Switch holder
(Resin)
Auto switch
c
Set screw (not used)
Switch bracket
(Stainless steel)
b
q BM2-: A set of a and b in the figure.

w BJ3-1: A set of c, d and e in the figure.
a
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in How to Order, the following auto switches can be mounted.
For detailed specifications, refer to pages 1719 to 1827.
Auto switch type
Reed
Model
D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW

D-G5NTL
Features
D-C80
D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B
Solid state
Electrical entry (Direction)
D-B53, C73, C76

Grommet (In-line)

With timer
With pre-wired connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to pages 1784 and 1785.
Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state auto switches (D-F9G, F9H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 1746.
1082
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:22 PM
Page 1109
Smooth Cylinder
Recommended Pneumatic Circuit

Refer to the diagrams below when controlling speed with the smooth cylinder.
Warning
Horizontal operation (Speed control)
1
11
Dual speed controller
Meter-in speed controller
Speed is controlled by meter-out circuit. Using concurrently the

meter-in circuit can alleviate the stick-slip. More stable low speed
operation can be achieved than meter-in circuit alone.
Meter-in speed controllers can reduce lurching while controlling

the speed. The two adjustment needles facilitate adjustment.
Vertical operation (Speed control)

1
11
P2
A
a
P1
(c)
(b)
P0
P0
REA
REB
REC
a
A
CY
W
CX
MQ

(2) Depending on the size of the load, installing a regulator with
check valve at position (b) can reduce lurching during descent
and operation delay during ascent.
As a guide,
when W + P0a>P0A,
adjust P1 to make W + P1a = P0A.

(2) Installing a regulator with check valve at position (c) can
reduce lurching during descent and operation delay during
ascent.
As a guide,
adjust P2 to make W + P2A = P0a.
W: Load (N) P0: Operating pressure (MPa) P1, P2: Reduced pressure (MPa) a: Rod side piston area (mm2) A: Head side piston area (mm2)
RHC
RZQ
D-
-X
Individual
-X
1109
P1023-P1110-E.qxd
08.11.17 3:22 PM
Page 1110
Smooth Cylinder
Lubricant
Caution
1. Operate without lubrication.
Lubrication may cause malfunction.
2. Do not use grease not specified by SMC.

Using grease other than that specified may cause malfunction.
Order using the following part numbers when only
maintenance grease is needed.
Grease
Volume
Part no.
5g
GR-L-005
10 g
GR-L-010
150 g
GR-L-150
3. Do not wipe off grease from the sliding part of the

air cylinder.
Wiping grease from the sliding part of the air cylinder forcefully
may cause malfunction.
1110
Air Source
Caution
1. Take measure to prevent pressure fluctuations.
Pressure fluctuations may cause malfunction.
1011-
Series
CM2X
Low speed cylinder

Double acting single rod / 20, 25, 32, 40
How to Order
Mounting style
Port thread type
Clean series
Nil
TN
TF
Relief type
10
11 Vacuum suction type
10 C D M2X L 40
Rc
NPT
G
Basic style
B
Axial foot style
L
FZ
Boss-cut rod side

flange style
150 H7B
Built-in magnet
Nil
D
No
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Number of
auto switches
Nil
S
n
Low speed cylinder
2 pcs.
1 pc.
n pcs.
Bore size
20
25
32
40
20mm
25mm
32mm
40mm
Type of auto switch

Reed switch
Solid state switch
C73
H7B, H7A1

Refer to the standard stroke table below.
Model
Vacuum
Relief type
suction type
Model
174
10-CM2X20
10-CM2X25
10-CM2X32
10-CM2X40
11-CM2X20
11-CM2X25
11-CM2X32
11-CM2X40
Bore size
(mm)
20
25
32
40
20
25
32
40
Port size Lubrication
Action
Standard stroke
(mm)
Auto switch
mounting
Double acting
single rod
25, 50, 75, 100, 125

150, 200, 250, 300
Cushion
Rubber
Air
1/8
1/4
1/8
1/4
Non-lube
Low speed cylinder
10- CM2X/11-CM2X
Specifications
Fluid
Proof pressure
10- (Relief type)

25
32
20
40
11- (Vacuum suction type)

25
32
40
Air cylinder
20
Air
1.5 MPa
1.0 MPa
Cushion
Piston speed
Piston rod diameter
Rod end thread
Rod end thread tolerance
Stroke tolerance
Port size
Vacuum suction port, Relief port
Grease
Particle generation grade
Suction flow rate (Reference values)
8
M8 x 1.25
14
M14 x 1.5
1/4
Air gripper
0.035 MPa
0.025 MPa
Without auto switch : 10C to 70C (With no freezing)
With auto switch : 10 to 60C (With no freezing)
Rubber bumper
1 to 200 mm/s
0.5 to 200 mm/s
10
12
10
12
8
14
M10 x 1.25
M10 x 1.25
M14 x 1.5 M8 x 1.25
JIS Class 2
+1.4
0 mm
1/8
1/8
1/4
M5 x 0.8
Fluorine grease
Grade 2
Grade 1
2 l/min (ANR)
Rotary actuator
Bore size
(mm)
Flow control
equipment
Directional control
valve
External dimensions and applicable auto switches are the same as 10-/11-CM2. Please refer to pages 15 to 20.
Specific Product Precautions

Precautions
Maintenance

When installing a cylinder or screwing a pipe fitting into the port,
the coupling portion of the cover could break if the cover is
rotated.
1. Grease pack
Use the following part number to order grease for maintenance.
Grease pack
GR-X-005 (5g)
Warning
Caution
Air preparation
equipment
Caution
Fittings & Tubing
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
Clean gas filter
Pressure switch
1. Be careful of the snap ring to pop out.

When replacing the rod seal, take care that the snap ring does
not spring out while you are removing it.
175
Actuator / Common Precautions 1

Be sure to read before handling. Refer to the main text for precautions for each series.
Precaution on designing
Warning
1. There is a possibility of dangerous sudden action by air
cylinders if sliding parts of machinery are twisted due to
external forces, etc.
In such cases, personal injury by catching hands or feet in the
machinery, or damage to the machinery itself may occur.
Therefore, the machine should be adjusted to operate smoothly
and designed to avoid such dangers.
2. A protective cover is recommended to minimize the risk of
personal injury.
If a driven object and moving parts of a cylinder are in close
proximity, personal injury may occur. Design the structure to
avoid contact with the human body.
3. Securely tighten all stationary parts and connected parts so
that they will not become loose.
Particularly when a cylinder operates at a high frequency or is
installed in a place where there is a lot of vibration, ensure that all
parts remain secure.
4. A deceleration circuit may be required.
When a driven object is operated at high speed or the load is
heavy, a cylinder's cushion will not be sufficient to absorb the
impact. Install a deceleration circuit to reduce the speed before
cushioning to relieve the impact.
In this case, the rigidity of the machinery should also be
examined.
5. Consider a possible drop in circuit pressure due to a power
outage, etc.
When a cylinder is used in a clamping mechanism, there is a
danger of workpiece dropping if there is a decrease in clamping
force due to a drop in circuit pressure caused by a power outage,
etc. Therefore, safety equipment should be installed to prevent
damage to machinery and personal injury. Suspension
mechanisms and lifting devices also require consideration for
drop prevention.
6. Consider a possible loss of power source.
Measures should be taken to avoid personal injury and
equipment damage in the event that there is a loss of power to
equipment controlled by pneumatics, electricity, or hydraulics.
7. Design circuitry to prevent the sudden lurching of driven
objects.
When a cylinder is driven by an exhaust center type directional
control valve or when it is started up after residual pressure is
exhausted from the circuit, etc., the piston and its driven object
will lurch when the cylinder is operated at high speed if pressure
is applied to one side of the cylinder, due to the absence of air
pressure inside the cylinder. Therefore, equipment should be
selected and circuits should be designed to prevent this sudden
lurching, because there is a danger of personal injury and/or
damage to equipment when this occurs.
8. Consider emergency stops.
Design the machinery so that personal injury and/or damage to
machinery and equipment will not occur when the machinery is
stopped by a safety device under abnormal conditions, such as a
power outage or a manual emergency stop.
9. Consider the action when operation is restarted after an
emergency stop or abnormal stop.
Design the machinery so that personal injury or equipment
damage will not occur upon restart of operation.
When the cylinder has to be reset at the start position, install
safety manual control equipment.
176
Selection
Warning
1. Confirm the specifications.
The products featured in this catalog are designed for use in
industrial compressed air systems. If the products are used in
conditions where pressure and/or temperature are outside the
range of specifications, damage and/or malfunctions may occur.
Do not use in these conditions. (Refer to the specifications).
Please consult with SMC if you use a fluid other than compressed
air.
2. Intermediate Stops
With a 3-position closed center type valve, it is difficult to
accurately and precisely stop a piston at the required position in
the same way as can be done with hydraulic pressure due to the
compressibility of air.
Furthermore, since valves and cylinders, etc. are not guaranteed
for zero air leakage, it may not be possible to hold a stopped
position for an extended period of time. Please contact with SMC
when it is necessary to hold a stopped position for an extended
period of time.
Caution
1. Operate within the limits of the maximum feasible stroke.
Operation that exceeds the maximum stroke may damage a
piston rod. Refer to the air cylinder model selection procedures
for the maximum feasible strokes.
2. Operate a cylinder within a range such that collision damage
will not occur to a piston at the stroke end.
Operate a cylinder within a range so that a piston having inertial
force will not be damaged when it collides against the cover at the
stroke end. Refer to the air cylinder model selection procedures
for the maximum feasible strokes.
3. Use a speed controller to adjust the cylinder speed,
gradually increasing from a low speed to the desired speed
setting.
4. Provide intermediate supports for long stroke cylinders.
An intermediate support should be provided in order to prevent
damage to a long stroke cylinder, due to problems such as
sagging of the rod, deflection of the cylinder tube, vibration and
external load.

Air cylinder
Mounting
Air Supply
1. Be certain to match the rod shaft center with the load and
direction of movement when connecting.
When not properly matched, problems may arise with the rod and
tube, and damage may be caused due to friction on areas such
as the inner tube surface, bushings, rod surface, and seals.
1. Use clean air.

Do not use compressed air which contains chemicals, synthetic
oil containing organic solvents, salts or corrosive gases, etc. as
this may cause damage or malfunction.
Caution
5. Instruction manual
Install the products and operate them only after reading the
instruction manual carefully and understanding its contents.
Also keep the manual where it can be referred to as necessary.
3. Use the product within the specified range of fluid and

ambient temperature.
Take measures to prevent freezing at temperature below 5C,
since moisture in circuits may freeze and cause damage to seals
and lead to malfunctions.
Air gripper
Directional control
valve
4. Do not use until you verify that the equipment can operate
properly.
After mounting, repairs, or modification, etc., connect the air
supply and electric power, and then confirm proper mounting by
means of appropriate function and leak tests.
2. Install an aftercooler, air dryer, or water separator (Drain

Catch).
Compressed air that includes excessive drainage may cause
malfunction of valves and other pneumatic equipment. To prevent
this, install an air dryer, aftercooler or water separator (drain
catch), etc.
Flow control
equipment
3. Do not scratch or gouge the sliding portion of the cylinder

tube or the piston rod by striking it with an object, or
squeezing it.
The tube bore is manufactured under precise tolerances. Thus,
even a slight deformation could lead to a malfunction.
Moreover, scratches or gouges, etc. in the piston rod may lead to
damaged seals and cause air leakage.
Caution
1. Install air filters.
Install air filters close to valves at their upstream side. A filtration
degree of 5m or less should be selected.
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
2. When using an external guide, connect the rod end and the
load in such a way that there is no interference at any point
within the stroke.
Rotary actuator
Warning
Cushion
Caution
Fittings & Tubing
1. Readjust with a cushion needle.

Cushions are adjusted at the time of shipment; however, the
cushion needle on the cover should be readjusted, when the
product is put into service based on factors such as the size of
the load and the operating speed. When the cushion needle is
turned clockwise, the restriction becomes smaller and the
cushion's effectiveness is increased. Tighten the lock nut securely
after adjustment is performed.
Clean gas filter
Pressure switch
Air preparation
equipment
2. Do not operate the actuator with the cushion needle fully

closed.
This could damage the seals.
177

Operating Environment
Warning
1. Do not use in atmospheres or locations where corrosion
hazards exist.
Refer to the construction drawings regarding cylinder materials.
2. In locations where ultrapure water or cleaning solvent, etc.
splashes on the equipment, take suitable measures to
protect the rod.
Maintenance
Warning
1. Perform maintenance procedures as shown in the
instruction manual.
Improper handling may result in malfunction and damage of
machinery or equipment.
2. Removal of equipment, and supply / exhaust of compressed
air
Before any machinery or equipment is removed, first ensure that
the appropriate measures are in place to prevent the fall or erratic
movement of driven objects and equipment, then cut off the
electric power and release the compressed air in the system.
When machinery is restarted, proceed with caution after
confirming that appropriate measures are in place to prevent
cylinders from sudden movement.
Caution
1. Drain flushing
Remove drainage from air filters regularly.
178
Auto switch / Common Precautions 1
V (mm/s) =
Auto switch operation range (mm)

x 1000
Load operating time (ms)
In cases of high piston speed, the use of an auto switch (D-F5NT,

F7NT, G5NT and M5T) with a built-in OFF delay timer (approx.
200ms) makes it possible to extend the load operating time.
4. Wiring should be kept as short as possible.
<Reed switch>
As the length of the wiring to a load gets longer, the rush current
at switching ON becomes greater, and this may shorten the
product's life. (The switch will stay ON all the time).
1) For an auto switch without a contact protection circuit, use a
contact protection box when the wire length is 5m or longer.
2) Even if an auto switch has a built-in contact protection circuit,
when the wiring is more than 30m long, it is not able to
adequately absorb the rush current and its life may be
reduced. It is again necessary to connect a contact protection
box in order to extend its life. Please contact SMC in this case.
<Solid state switch>
3) Although wire length should not affect switch function, use a
wire 100m or shorter.
5. Use caution to internal voltage drop of a switch.
<Reed switch>
1. Switches with an indicator light (except D-A56/A76H/ A96/A96
V/C76/E76A/Z76)
If auto switches are connected in series as shown below, please
note that there will be a large voltage drop because of internal
resistance in the light emitting diodes. (Refer to internal voltage
drop in the auto switch specifications.)
[The voltage drop will be "n" times larger when "n" auto switches
are connected.]
The load may be ineffective even though the auto switch function
is normal.
6. Use caution to the leakage current.

With a 2-wire solid state auto switch, current (leakage current)
flows to the load to operate the internal circuit even when in the
OFF state.
Current to operate load (OFF condition) > Leakage current
If the condition given in the above formula is not met, it will not
reset correctly (stays ON). Use a 3-wire switch if this specification
cannot be satisfied.
Moreover, leakage current flow to the load will be "n" times larger
when "n" auto switches are connected in parallel.
7. Do not use a load that generates surge voltage.
<Reed switch>
When driving a load such as a relay that generates a surge
voltage, use a switch with a built-in contact protection circuit or a
contact protection box.
Although a zener diode for surge protection is connected to the
output side of a solid state auto switch, damage may still occur if
the surge is applied repeatedly. When a load, such as a relay or
solenoid, which generates surge is directly driven, use a type of
switch with a built-in surge absorbing element.
8. Cautions for use in an interlock circuit
When an auto switch is used for an interlock signal requiring high
reliability, devise a double interlock system to avoid trouble by
providing a mechanical protection function, or by also using
another switch (sensor) together with the auto switch.
Also perform periodic maintenance inspections and confirm
proper operation.
9. Ensure sufficient space for maintenance activities.
When designing an application, be sure to allow sufficient space
for maintenance and inspection.
Air gripper
Clean gas filter
Directional control
valve
3. Use caution to the ON time of a switch at the intermediate

position of stroke.
When an auto switch is placed at an intermediate position of the
stroke and a load is driven at the time the piston passes, the auto
switch will operate, but if the speed is too fast, the operating time
will be shortened and the load may not operate properly. The
maximum detectable piston speed is :
2) If the internal resistance of a light emitting diode causes a

problem, select a switch without an indicator light (D-A6,
A80, A80H, A90, A90V, C80, R80, 90, E80A, Z80).
3) Generally, the internal voltage drop will be greater with a 2wire solid state auto switch than with a reed switch. Take the
same precautions as in 1).
Also please note that a 12VDC relay is not applicable.
Flow control
equipment
Power voltage Internal voltage drop of switch > Minimum

operating voltage of load
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
2. Use caution when multiple cylinders are used in close

proximity to each other.
When two or more auto switch cylinders are lined up in close
proximity to each other, magnetic field interference may cause
the switches to malfunction. Maintain a minimum cylinder
separation of 40mm. (When the allowable interval is specified for
each cylinder series, use the indicated value.)
the load may be ineffective even though the auto switch function
is normal. Therefore, the formula below should be satisfied after
confirming the minimum operating voltage of the load.
Fittings & Tubing
Similarly, when operating below a specified voltage, it is possible that
Air preparation
equipment
Warning
1. Confirm the specifications.
Read the specifications carefully and use this product
appropriately. The product may be damaged or malfunction if it is
used outside the specifications of current voltage, temperature or
impact.
Pressure switch
Design/Selection
Rotary actuator
Air cylinder
Load
179

Mounting/Adjustment
Warning
Warning
1. Do not drop or bump.

Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts (300m/s2 or more
for reed switches and 1000m/s2 or more for solid state switches)
while handling. Although the body of the switch may not be
damaged, the inside of the switch could be damaged and cause a
malfunction.
2. Do not carry a cylinder by the auto switch lead wires.
Never carry a cylinder by its lead wires. This may not only cause
broken lead wires, but it may cause internal elements of the
switch to be damaged by the stress.
3. Mount switches using the proper tightening torque.
When a switch is tightened beyond the range of tightening torque,
the mounting screws or switch may be damaged.
On the other hand, tightening below the range of tightening
torque may allow the switch to slip out of position.
4. Mount a switch at the center of the operating range.
Adjust the mounting position of an auto switch so that the piston
stops at the center of the operating range (the range in which a
switch is ON). (The mounting positions shown in the catalog
indicate the optimum position at the stroke end.) If mounted at the
end of the operating range (around the borderline of ON and
OFF), the operation will be unstable.
<D-M9>
If this auto switch replaces the conventional model, it may not
function depending on the application (shown below) because its
operation range is shorter.
Applications where at the end, the stopping position shifting
range is larger than the operation range
e.g. Workpiece pushing, pressing into a hole, or clamping
Applications where an auto switch is used to detect
intermediate stopping positions (Detecting time is
shortened).
As indicated above, mount a switch at the center of the
operating range.
Wiring
Warning
1. Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching lead wires.
Broken lead wires will result from repeatedly applying bending
stress or stretching force to lead wires.
2. Be sure to connect the load before power is applied.
<2-wire type>
If the power is turned on when an auto switch is not connected to
a load, the switch will be instantly damaged because of excess
current.
3. Confirm proper insulation of wiring.
Be certain that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with
other circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between
terminals, etc.). Damage may occur due to excess current flow
into a switch.
4. Do not wire with power lines or high voltage lines.
Wire separately from power lines or high voltage lines, avoiding
parallel wiring or wiring in the same conduit with these lines.
Control circuits, including auto switches, may malfunction due to
180
Wiring
5. Do not allow short circuiting of loads.

<Reed switch>
If the power is turned on with a load in a short circuited condition,
the switch will be instantly damaged because of excess current
flow into the switch.
Models M-F9(V), F9W(V), J51, G5NB and all models of PNP
output switches do not have built-in short circuit prevention
circuits. If loads are short circuited, the switches will be instantly
damaged.
Use caution to avoid reverse wiring with the brown power supply
line and the black output line on 3 -wire type switches.
6. Avoid incorrect wiring.
<Reed switch>
A 24VDC switch with indicator light has polarity. The brown lead
wire or terminal No.1 is (+), and the blue lead wire or terminal
No.2 is ().
[In the case of model D-97, the side without indicator is (+) and
the blue line side is ().]
1) If connections are reversed, a switch will operate, however, the
light emitting diode will not light up.
Also please note that a current greater than the maximum
specified one will damage a light emitting diode and make it
inoperable.
Applicable models
D-A73, A73H, A73C, C73, C73C, E73A, Z73, R73
D-97, 93A, A93, A93V
D-A33, A34, A33A, A34A, A44, A44A
D-A53, A54, B53, B54
2) However, when using a 2 color indication auto switch (DA79W, A59W, B59W), be aware that the switch will constantly
remain ON if the connections are reversed.
1) If connections are reversed on a 2-wire type switch, the switch
will not be damaged if protected by a protection circuit, but the
switch will always stay in an ON state. However, it is still
necessary to avoid reversed connections, since the switch
could be damaged by a load short circuit in this condition.
2) If connections are reversed (power supply line (+) and power
supply line () on a 3-wire type switch, the switch will be
protected by a protection circuit. However, if the power supply
line (+) is connected to the blue wire and the power supply line
() is connected to the black wire, the switch will be damaged.
<D-M9>
D-M9 does not have built-in short-circuit prevention circuits.
Reverse connection of power supply line (+) and () may damage
the switch.

Air cylinder
Environment
Maintenance
1. Never use in the presence of explosive gases.

Our auto switches are not explosion proof. Never use them in the
presence of explosive gas, as this may cause a serious
explosion.
1. Perform the following maintenance periodically in order to

prevent possible danger due to unexpected auto switch
malfunction.
6. Do not use in environments where there is excessive impact

shock.
<Reed switch>
2
When excessive impact (300 m/s or more) is applied to a reed
switch during operation, the contact point may malfunction and
generate or cut off a signal momentarily (1ms or less). Please
consult with SMC regarding the need to use a solid state switch
depending on the environment.
7. Do not use in locations where surges are generated.
When there are units (solenoid type lifters, high frequency
induction furnaces, motors, etc.) which generate a large amount
of surge in the area around cylinders with solid state auto
switches, this may cause deterioration or damage to the switches.
Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines.
8. Avoid close contact with magnetic substances.
When a magnetic substance (substance attracted by a magnet) is
brought into close proximity with an auto switch cylinder, it may
cause the auto switches to malfunction due to a loss of the
magnetic force inside the cylinder.
Rotary actuator
Air gripper
Directional control
valve
Confirm that the green LED is ON when stopped at the set

position. If the red LED is ON when stopped at the set position,
the mounting position is not appropriate. Readjust the
mounting position until the green LED lights up.
Warning
1. Please consult with SMC concerning water resistance,
elasticity of lead wires, etc.
Lead wire color changes

Lead wire colors of SMC auto switches have been changed in order to meet NECA (Nippon
Electric Control Equipment Industries Association) Standard 0402 for production beginning
September, 1996 and thereafter.Special care should be taken regarding wire polarity
during the time that both old and new colors exist.
2-wire system
Output (+)
3-wire system
Old
New
Red
Brown
Output () Black
Blue
Power supply +
Power supply +
Old
New
Red
Brown
Power supply GND Black

Output
White
Diagnostic output Yellow
Blue
Black
Orange
New
Brown

Output
Solid state with diagnostic output
Old
Red
White
Blue
Black
Solid state with latch type diagnostic output

Power supply +
Old
New
Red
Brown

Output
White
Latch type diagnostic output Yellow
Blue
Black
Orange
Caution
1. When stripping the cable clad, take care with the orientation
of the cable being stripped. The insulator may accidentally be
torn or damaged depending on the orientation.(D-M9 only)
Recommended tools are shown below.

Manufacturer
VESSEL
TOKYO IDEAL
Model name
Wire stripper
Strip master
Flow control
equipment
Other
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
5. Do not use in environments with temperature cycles.

Please consult with SMC if switches are to be used where there
are temperature cycles other than normal temperature changes,
as they may be adversely affected internally.
3) Confirm that the green light on the 2-color indicator type switch
lights up.
Fittings & Tubing
4. Do not use in environments with oil or chemicals.

Please consult with SMC if auto switches will be used in an
environment with coolants, cleaning solvents, various oils or
chemicals. If auto switches are used under these conditions for
even a short time, they may be adversely affected by improper
insulation, a malfunction due to swelling of the potting resin, or
hardening of the lead wires.
2) Confirm that there is no damage to lead wires.

To prevent faulty insulation, replace switches or repair lead
wires if damage is discovered.
Model no.
No 3000G
45-089
Stripper for round cable (2.0) can be used for a 2-wire type cable.
181
Air preparation
equipment
3. Do not use in environments where the auto switches will

be constantly exposed to water.
Although switches except D-A3/A44/G39/K39 satisfy the
IEC standard IP67 structure (JIS C 0920: anti-immersion
structure), do not use switches in applications where continually
exposed to water splash or spray. Poor insulation or swelling of
the potting resin inside switches may cause malfunction.
1) Securely tighten switch mounting screws.

If screws become loose or the mounting position is dislocated,
retighten screws securely after readjusting the mounting
position.
Pressure switch
2. Do not use in an area where a magnetic field is generated.

Auto switches will malfunction or magnets inside cylinders will
become demagnetized. (Please consult with SMC regarding the
availability of a magnetic field resistant auto switch.)
Warning
Clean gas filter
Warning
Reed switch
Solid state switch
D-C7/C8
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5/B6
D-B59W
D-A3/A4
D-A3A/A44A
D-A3C/A44C
D-A7/A8
D-A7H/A80H
D-A73C/A80C
D-A79W
D-A5/A6
D-A59W
D-A9
D-A9V
D-Z7/Z8
D-H7
D-H7C
D-H7BAL
D-H7F
D-H7W
D-G5/K5
D-G5BAL
D-G59F
D-G5NTL
D-G5W/K59W
D-G39/K39
D-G39A/K39A
D-F7/J7
D-J79C
D-F7F
D-F7BAL
D-F7BAVL
D-F7V
D-F7NTL
D-F7W (V)
D-F5/J5
D-F5BAL
D-F5W/J59W
D-F5F
D-F5NTL
D-G39C/K39C
D-M9
D-M9V
D-F9W
D-F9WV
D-F9BAL
D-Y59A/Y7P/Y59B
D-Y69A/Y7PV/Y69B
D-Y7W
D-Y7WV
D-Y7BAL
D-P5WL
D-F9G/H
D-Y7G/H
D-G5NBL
D-F8
MXS
CYP
CDQSX
CDQ2X
6 to 25
15/32
12 to 25
32 to 63
CDM2X
MXQ
6 to 25
Please refer to the next page for applicable auto switches and cylinders in the fields marked with asterisks ().
182
20 to 40
MXP
6 to 16
40/63/100 MGF
MGP
12 to 63
CXS
6 to 32
CDQ2
32 to 100
CXSJ
CDQS
12 to 25
610
CDU
6 to 25
REC
CUJ
6 to 10
20 to 40
CDA2
40 to 63
CDG1
80/100
CDBM2
20 to 40
20 to 63
CDM2
Bore size
20 to 40
Cylinder series
10/16
CDJ2
Cylinder
Applicable auto switch list
Mounting brackets used for installing the compact auto switches D-A9/M9/F9 onto band mounting / tie-rod mounting /
groove mounting style cylinders are available.
Mounting
bracket
Rotary actuator
Applicable auto switch

Solid state switch
D-M9
D-F9W (2-color indication)
10-/11-/21-/22-CDJ2 Series
10-/11-/21-/22-CDM2 Series
10-/11-/21-/22-CDG1 Series
10-/11-REC Series
10-/11-CDM2X Series
Air gripper
Reed switch
D-A9
Applicable cylinder
Directional control
valve
Perpendicular entry is unavailable.
Flow control
equipment
Tie-rod mounting
Mounting
bracket
Applicable cylinder
10-/11-/21-/22-CDA2 Series
Applicable auto switch
Fittings & Tubing
Solid state switch

D-M9/M9V
D-F9W/F9WV (2-color indication)
D-F9BAL (water resistant type)
Groove mounting
Reed switch
D-A9/D-A9V
Air preparation
equipment
Mounting
bracket
Filter, Pressure
control equipment
Band mounting
Air cylinder
Compact auto switch mounting bracket
Applicable cylinder
Clean gas filter
Pressure switch
12-/13-/21-/22-MGP Series
183
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or equipment damage.
These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the labels of Caution, Warning or
Danger. They are all important notes for safety and must be followed in addition to International
Standards (ISO/IEC), Japan Industrial Standards (JIS)1) and other safety regulations2).
1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power General rules relating to systems.
ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power General rules relating to systems.
IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)
ISO 10218-1992: Manipulating industrial robots -Safety.
JIS B 8370: General rules for pneumatic equipment.
JIS B 8361: General rules for hydraulic equipment.
JIS B 9960-1: Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines. (Part 1: General requirements)
JIS B 8433-1993: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety.
etc.
2) Labor Safety and Sanitation Law, etc.
Caution: Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage.

Warning: Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life.
Danger : In extreme conditions, there is a possibility of serious injury or loss of life.
Warning
1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person who designs the equipment
or decides its specifications.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its compatibility with specific equipment must be
decided by the person who designs the equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results.
The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the responsibility of the person who has determined
its compatibility with the product. This person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its
latest catalog information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring the
equipment.
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery and equipment.
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly, operation and maintenance of machines or
equipment including our products must be performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced.
3. Do not service or attempt to remove product and machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed.
1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after measures to prevent falling or
runaway of the driven objects have been confirmed.
2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned above are implemented and the power
from any appropriate source is cut, and read and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products
carefully.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected operation and malfunction.
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety measures if the product is to
be used in any of the following conditions.
1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, space, shipping, vehicles, military,
medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits,
clutch and brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable for the standard
specifications described in the product catalog.
3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals requiring special safety analysis.
4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible failure by using a mechanical protective
function, and periodical checks to confirm proper operation.
Back matter 1
Safety Instructions
Caution
The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries.
The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing industries.
If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange specifications or a contract
if necessary. If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimer/Compliance Requirements

The product used is subject to the following Limited Warranty and Disclaimer and Compliance
Requirements. Read and accept them before using the product.
Limited Warranty and Disclaimer

1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years after the product is delivered.3)
Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or replacement parts. Please
consult your nearest sales branch.
2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly our responsibility,
a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided.
This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any other damage
incurred due to the failure of the product.
3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty terms and disclaimers
noted in the specified catalog for the particular products.
3) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.
A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered.
Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum pad or failure due to the
deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited warranty.
Compliance Requirements
When the product is exported, strictly follow the laws required by the Ministry of Economy, Trade
and Industry (Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law).
Back matter 2
Clean series: Common Precautions 1

Refer to the main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Air Supply
Caution
System Configuration
Refer to the "Air Preparation System" below for the quality of compressed air before configuring the system.
Main line
Sub-line
Aftercooler
(Air cooled)
Series HAA
Reciprocating air compressor

Aftercooler (Water cooled)
Series HAW
Air tank
Series AT
Main line filter

Series AFF
Aftercooler
(Air cooled)
Series HAA
Screw air compressor
Aftercooler (Water cooled)

Series HAW
Piping
1. Provide an inclination of 1cm per meter in the direction of the air
flow to the main piping.
2. If there is a line branching from the main piping, provide an outlet of
compressed air on top using a tee so that drainage accumulated in
the piping will not flow out.
3. Provide a drainage mechanism at every recessed point or dead end
to prevent drain accumulation.
4. For future piping extensions, plug the end of the piping with a tee.
5. Before piping
Before piping, the piping should be thoroughly blown out with air
(flushed) or washed to remove chips, cutting oil and other debris
from inside the pipe.
6. Wrapping of pipe tape
When screwing piping or fittings into ports, ensure that chips from
the pipe threads or sealing material do not get inside the valve.
Also, when pipe tape is used, leave 1.5 to 2 thread ridges exposed
at the end of the threads.
Winding
direction
Ex
po
se
Pipe tape
ap
pr
ox
.2
thr
ea
Back matter 3
ds
7. If air with a low dew point (40C or less) is required, do not use
nylon tube or resin fitting (except for fluorine resin) for the outlet
side of the membrane air dryer or heatless air dryer. Nylon tubing
could be affected by the ambient air and it thus might not be
possible to achieve the prescribed low dew point at the end of the
tube. Therefore, for low dew point air, use stainless steel or fluorine
tube.
Maintenance
1. If the heatless air dryer Series ID is left unused for a long period,
the absorbent may be moistened. Prior to use, close the valve on
the outlet side of the dryer for regeneration and drying.
Caution on Design
Employ a safe design, so that the following unexpected conditions will
not occur.
Warning
1. Provide a design that prevents high-temperature compressed
air from flowing into the outlet side of the cooling equipment.
If the flow of the coolant water in a water-cooled aftercooler is
stopped or if the fan motor of an air cooled aftercooler is stopped,
the high-temperature compressed air will flow to the outlet side of
the cooling equipment, causing the equipment on the outlet side
(such as the AFF, AM, AD, or IDF series) to be damaged or to
malfunction.
2. Provide a design in which interruptions in the supply of
compressed air are taken into consideration.
Air Supply
Local line
<For driving actuators>

Series AM
Series AMD
IDG, IDGH
Contaminants in compressed air

Moisture Solid
Oil mist concentration Odor
Series AMH
Refrigerated air dryer
Series IDF
Air tank
Series AT

Series IDF
Series
(Pressurized 0.3 m
0.01mg/m3 Little oil AME
dew point) 100 particles/ft3
(ANR)
odor
or less
10C
<For blowing>
Series ID
Series AME Series SF

+
Series AMF
IDGL, IDGS
Series IDU
Contaminants in compressed air

Moisture Solid Oil mist concentration Odor
Atmospheric 0.01 m
pressure dew 1 particle/ft3 0.004mg/m3
(ANR)
point 50C or less
or less
There are cases in which compressed air cannot flow due to the
freezing of the refrigerated air dryer or a malfunction (heatless
dryer) in the switching valve.
Caution
3. Design a layout in which the leakage of the coolant water and
the dripping of condensation are taken into consideration.
A water-cooled aftercooler that uses coolant water could lead to
water leakage due to freezing. Depending on the operating
conditions, the refrigerated air dryer and its downstream pipes
could create a dripping of water droplets due to condensation
formed by supercooling.
4. Provide a design that prevents back pressure and backflow.
The generation of back pressure and backflow could lead to
No oil
odor
equipment damage.
Take appropriate safety measures, including the proper installation
methods.
5. Depending on the model and operating conditions, the life
span of air cylinders may be shortened when they are used in
an environment of super dry air (atmospheric pressure dew
point: 50C) or high-purity nitrogen gas or when such super
dry air or high-purity nitrogen gas is used as the fluid.
Please contact with SMC for further details on applicable series,
models, operating conditions and life spans.
6. Blowing system
Even a small amount of dust can be a problem for blowing
systems.
Install Clean Gas Filter Series SF to the end of the blowing line.
Back matter 4

Refer to the main text for detailed precautions on every series.
Piping: Inside of Clean Room
Caution
1. Do not make the piping for the air cylinder relief port and
regulator breathing vent piping common with solenoid valve
exhaust piping.
This can cause malfunctions in the air cylinder or regulator
pressure change.
2. Arrange the piping so that the exhaust air of the solenoid
valves is exhausted outside of the clean room.
4. Arrange the membrane dryer air purge piping using a standard

size tubing so that air is exhausted outside the clean room.
5. Take precautions so that the threaded portion of the piping
connection or the tubing connection will not be loosened.
Take sufficient precautions against the piping shaking along with
the vibration of the equipment.
6. Use polyurethane tubing containing no plasticizer.
3. Air filter drain piping

Exhaust drainage outside the clean room through piping from the
drain guide of the air filter.
Inside clean room
Relief port piping
Solenoid valve
exhaust piping
Breathing
vent piping of
regulator
Purge air piping Drain piping

for membrane
air dryer
Handling
Lubrication / In the Case of Actuator
1. The inner bag of a double-packed clean series package should

be opened in a clean room or clean environment.
Be sure to wash your hands after handling fluororesin grease.

The grease itself is not hazardous but it can produce a hazardous gas
at temperatures exceeding 260C.
Caution
2. When standard pneumatic equipment is brought into a clean
room, spray high-purity air upon it and remove dust
thoroughly by wiping the external surfaces of the cylinder
tube, solenoid valves and air line equipment with alcohol.
3. To replace parts or disassemble the product in a clean room,
first exhaust the compressed air inside the piping to the
outside of the clean room before the work.
4. Do not use rotation type mounting brackets such as clevises,
trunnions, etc.. They will generate a considerable amount of
particulate matter due to the sliding friction between the metal
parts.
Warning
Caution
1. Do not use any greases but those specified by SMC.
Use of greases not specified will cause malfunctions or
particle generation.
2. Do not lubricate the products since they are of a nonlubricant
type.
As the clean series actuators are lubricated at the factory with
fluororesin grease, the product specifications may not be satisfied if
turbine oil or other such lubricants are applied.
Piston speed
Caution
The cylinder speed upper limit that retains the particle
generation grade is 400 mm/s.
Back matter 5

Refer to the main text for detailed precautions for every series.
Suction flow rate of vacuum suction types
Caution
For the vacuum suction types (Series 11-/13-/22-),
perform vacuum suction at the vacuum port to retain the
particle generation grade.
The optimum suction flow rate varies depending on series
and sizes. Refer to "Suction flow rate of vacuum suction type
(Reference values)" for each series. (The vacuum pressure
will be approximately -27 kPa at around 1 m from the
vacuum suction port.) Please consult SMC for further details.
Location where vacuum
pressure is measured
Piping length (m)
Vacuum source
11-CJ2
11-CM2
11-CQ
Vacuum pressure (MPa)
-0.027
-0.028
13-MJP
-0.029
11-CU
-0.030
-0.031
11-CXS
-0.032
3
Piping length (m)
Vacuum pressure (MPa)
Adjust the measured vacuum pressure using a

regulator to be the value in the graphs below.
0
-0.001
-0.002
-0.003
-0.004
-0.005
-0.006
-0.007
-0.008
-0.009
-0.010
-0.011
-0.012
13-MXS16
13-MXS20
13-MXS25
3
Piping length (m)
Back matter 6
Akihabara UDX 15F,

4-14-1, Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021, JAPAN
Phone: 03-5207-8249 FAX: 03-5298-5362
URL http://www.smcworld.com
2008 SMC Corporation All Rights Reserved
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice
and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
D-SZ
1st printing MT printing MT 16400SZ
Printed in Japan.

Air Cylinder CM2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Air Cylinder CM2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Air Cylinder

Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y

With End Lock

Combinations of Standard Products and Made to Order Specifications

Use the new Smooth Cylinder Series CM2Y to realize

Double clevis pins made of stainless

Double knuckle joint with spring pin

With coil scraper

(Direct mount, Non-rotating) (Centralized Piping) (Low Friction)

Double acting Double acting

(With end Lock)

Low-speed cylinder Note 2)

With one-touch fittings

With rod boot

Copper and Fluorine-free

Heat-resistant cylinder (10 to 150 C) Note 1)

Cold-resistant cylinder Note 1)

External stainless steel cylinder

Special port position

With heavy duty scraper

Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type

Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

Vacuum specification (Rod through-hole)

Note 1) The products with an auto switch are not compatible.

Air Cylinder: Standard Type

Cylinder stroke (mm)

T Head side trunnion style

(Refer to Standard Stroke on page 129.)

Boss-cut rod side

Boss-cut rod side

Air-hydro cylinder: Rubber bumber only

With auto switch

Port thread type

Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model

If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is

Without auto switch

For the applicable auto switch model, refer to

Solid state switch

Water resistant (2-color indication)

Lead wire length (m)

Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m Nil (Example) M9NW

Air Cylinder: Standard Type

Bore size (mm)

Double acting, Single rod

Maximum operating pressure

Minimum operating pressure

Ambient and fluid temperature

Stroke length tolerance

Rubber bumper: 50 to 750 mm/s, Air cushion: 50 to 1000 mm/s

Rubber bumper, Air cushion

With air cushion

XA Change of rod end shape

Heat resistant cylinder (150

Cold resistant cylinder

Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)

XB12 External stainless steel cylinder

Special port location

With heavy duty scraper

Heat resistant cylinder (110

Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel

Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type

Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type

Standard stroke (1)

25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150